';Wiji; 


'-it:' 


y; 


'a 


^, 


'^^^^ 


5^ 


.» 


:  ^ 


%\f>  > 


y 


iS^. 


IMAGE  EVALUATION 
TEST  TARGET  (MT-3) 


1.0 


1^  i^    12.2 

L25  i U   IL6 


I.I 


■"       140 

US       IBB 

U 


Photographic 

Sciences 

Corporation 


•I' 


'^^ 


'^'^  A  ^«l) 


23  WEST  MAIN  STREET 

WEBSTER,  N.Y.  14580 

(716)  872-4503 


^ 
^ 


mf 


«'; 


CIHM/ICMH 

Microfiche 

Series. 


CIHM/ICMH 
Collection  de 
microfiches. 


Canadian  Institute  for  Historical  Microreproductions  /  Institut  Canadian  de  microreproductions  historiques 


mm 


Technical  and  Bibliographic  Notes/Notes  techniques  et  bibliographiques 


The  Institute  has  attempted  to  obtain  the  best 
original  copy  available  for  filming.  Features  of  this 
copy  which  may  be  bibliographically  unique, 
which  may  alter  any  of  the  images  in  the 
reproduction,  or  which  may  significantly  change 
the  usual  method  of  filming,  are  checked  below. 


D 


Coloured  covers/ 
Couverture  de  couleur 


I      I    Covers  damaged/ 


Couvertu"'  endommagde 


□    Covers  restored  and/or  laminated/ 
Couverture  restaurde  et/ou  pellicuide 


Cover  title  missing/ 

Le  titre  de  couverture  manque 


□    Coloured  maps/ 
Cartes  gdographiquos  en  couleur 

□    Coloured  ink  (i.e.  other  than  blue  or  black)/ 
Encre  de  couleur  (i.e.  autre  que  bleue  ou  noire) 

I      I    Coloured  plates  and/or  illustrations/ 


D 
D 


D 


D 


Planches  et/ou  illustrations  en  couleur 

Bound  with  other  material/ 
Relid  avec  d'autres  documents 

Tight  binding  may  cause  shadows  or  distortion 
aloi.-g  interior  margin/ 

La  re  liure  serrde  peut  causer  de  I'ombre  ou  de  la 
distortion  le  long  de  la  marge  int^rieure 

Blank  leaves  added  during  restoration  may 
appear  within  the  text.  Whenever  possible,  these 
have  been  omitted  from  filming/ 
II  se  peut  que  certaines  pages  blanches  ajouttes 
lors  d'une  restauration  apparaissent  dans  le  texte, 
mais,  lorsque  cela  dtait  possible,  ces  pages  n'ont 
pas  6t6  filmdes. 

Additional  comments:/ 
Commentaires  suppl6mentaires: 


L'Institut  a  microfilm^  le  meilleur  exemplaire 
qu'il  lui  a  6t6  possible  de  se  procurer.  Les  details 
de  cet  exemplaire  qui  sont  peut-Atre  uniques  du 
point  de  vue  bibliographique,  qui  peuvent  modifier 
une  image  reproduite,  ou  qui  peuvent  exiger  une 
modification  dans  la  mdthode  normale  de  filmage 
sont  indiqu6s  ci-dessous. 


□    Coloured  pages/ 
Pages  de  couleur 

□    Pages  damaged/ 
Pages  endommagdes 

I      I    Pages  restored  and/or  laminated/ 


D 


Pages  restaur^es  et/ou  peiiiculdes 

Pages  discoloured,  stained  or  foxe< 
Pages  d6color6es,  tachet^es  ou  piqu6es 

Pages  detached/ 
Pages  ddtach^es 

Shovvthroughy 
Transparence 

Quality  of  prir 

Quality  in6gale  de  I'impression 

Includes  supplementary  materia 
Comprend  du  materiel  suppl^mentaire 


I  I  Pages  discoloured,  stained  or  foxed/ 

I  I  Pages  detached/ 

I  I  Shovvthrough/ 

I  I  Quality  of  print  varies/ 

I  I  Includes  supplementary  material/ 


□    Only  edition  available/ 
Seuie  Edition  disponible 


Pages  wholly  or  partially  obscured  by  errata 
slips,  tissues,  etc.,  have  been  refilmed  to 
ensure  the  best  possible  image/ 
Les  pages  totalement  ou  partiellement 
obscurcies  par  un  feuillet  d'errata,  une  pelure, 
etc.,  ont  6t6  film6es  d  nouveau  de  fapon  d 
obtenir  la  meilleure  image  possible. 


This  item  is  filmed  at  the  reduction  ratio  checked  below/ 

Ce  document  est  film^  au  taux  de  reduction  indiquA  ci-dessous. 

10X  14X  18X  22X 


26X 


30X 


12X 


16X 


20X 


24X 


28X 


32X 


mmmmmimmauLamiiimm^tlt 


till  ^fj/tfL  -;'&.S^'Vi  '.'J 


J 


laire 
B  details 
ifues  du 
It  modifier 
Jger  une 
e  filmage 


The  copy  filmed  here  has  been  reproduced  thanits 
to  the  generosity  of: 

Library  of  Congress 
Photoduplication  Service 

The  images  appearing  here  are  the  best  quality 
possible  considering  the  condition  and  legibility 
of  the  original  copy  and  in  keeping  with  the 
filming  contract  specifications. 


L'exemplaire  film*  fut  reproduit  grAce  A  la 
gAnArosltA  de: 

Library  of  Congress 
Photoduplication  Service 

Les  Images  suivantes  ont  AtA  reproduites  avec  le 
plus  grand  soin,  compte  tenu  de  la  condition  et 
de  la  nettetA  de  I'exemplaire  film6,  et  en 
conformity  avec  les  conditions  du  contrat  de 
filmage. 


1/ 
udes 


Original  copies  in  printed  paper  covers  are  filmed 
beginning  with  the  front  cover  and  ending  on 
the  last  page  with  a  printed  or  illustrated  impres- 
sion, or  the  back  cover  when  appropriate.  All 
other  original  copies  are  filmed  beginning  on  the 
first  page  with  a  printed  or  Illustrated  impres- 
sion, and  ending  on  the  last  page  with  a  printed 
or  illustrated  impression. 


The  last  recorded  frame  on  each  microfiche 
shall  contain  the  symbol  — •»-  (meaning  "CON- 
TINUED"), or  the  symbol  V  (meaning  "END"), 
whichever  applies. 


Les  exemplaires  orlglnaux  dont  la  couverture  ere 
papier  est  imprlmte  sont  filmAs  en  commenpant 
par  le  premier  plat  et  en  terminant  soit  par  la 
dernlAre  page  qui  comporte  une  emprelnte 
d'impresslon  ou  d'lllustratlon,  soit  par  le  second 
plat,  salon  le  cas.  Tous  les  autres  exemplaires 
orlglnaux  sont  filmis  en  commen^ant  par  la 
premiAre  page  qui  comporte  une  empreinte 
d'impresslon  ou  d'lllustratlon  et  en  terminant  par 
la  dernlAre  page  qui  comporte  une  telle 
emprelnte. 

Un  des  symboles  sulvants  apparattra  sur  la 
dernlAre  image  de  cheque  microfiche,  selon  le 
cas:  ie  symbole  — ►  signifle  "A  SUIVRE",  le 
symbole  V  signlfie  "FIN". 


lire 


Maps,  plates,  charts,  etc.,  may  be  filmed  at 
different  reduction  ratios.  Those  too  large  to  be 
entirely  included  In  one  exposure  are  filmed 
beginning  in  the  upper  left  hand  corner,  left  to 
right  and  top  to  bottom,  as  many  frames  as 
required.  The  following  diagrams  illustrate  the 
method: 


Les  cartes,  planches,  tableaux,  etc.,  peuvent  Atre 
filmte  A  des  taux  de  rMuction  diff6rents. 
Lorsque  le  document  est  trop  grand  pour  Atre 
reprodult  en  un  seul  cllch6,  II  est  fllmA  d  partir 
de  Tangle  supArleur  gauche,  de  gauche  d  droite, 
et  de  haut  en  bas,  en  prenant  le  nombre 
d'images  nAcessalre.  Les  diagrammes  suivants 
illustrent  la  mAthode. 


by  errata 
led  to 

9nt 

ine  pelure, 

apon  d 


1  2  3 


1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

32X 


rini  wntinnn 


"TilMTWtinni^jp 


mmmmmmmmmmt 


tttmr^immm 


imMwniiriiiiniiainiiiinii 


■■ii»»rw<mr,ii,>,ii!i<im> 


Ot: 


S«. 


^■** nil 


fitijel-ic^r/ 


inmi  0f  ||on0 


BBtNQ    A 


COMPLETE  GUIDE 

TO  THK  ACQUISITION  OF 


Otis 


v<> 


^   BX.IfrS.LOWQLBY. 


CINCINNATI- 

LONGLEY  BROTHERS,  PHONETIC  PUBLrSHFR<» 
168*  VINE  ST..  BETWEEN  FOURTH  AN^,™' 
_  —AND   FOR  SALE  Br  — 

1855. 


Entered  according  to  Act  cf  Congress,  in  the  year  1853, 

BY  LONOIiBY    BROTHBHS. 

In  the  Clerli's  Office  of   the   District  Court  for  the 

Southern  District  of  Ohio. 


/ 


c 
\ 
t 
I 

P 
a 
ai 
w 
ni 
in 
th 
in 
of 

Pi- 
Tl 


the 
wis 
the 
in  I 


.' ...'....'..  I  I  n — r  


AAAAAA*AAAA*ik**i»* 


,  year  1853, 

I. 

irt  for  the 


|:^refiife. 


authnrr''T?         .  ^'"""''   ''^  P'^°"«"''   Shorthand,    the 
author  has  had  one  leading  object  in  view,   namely:   to  fur- 

Lr  J  "  K  '  T^  '°'''"^  "'•  '^''«  ''°°ks  that  have 
heretofore  been  used  have  all  answered  a  good  purpose;  but 
they  have,  w.th  one  exception  probably,  been  rendered  com- 
parat,vely  obsolete  by  the  introduction  into  the  system  of  two 
or  three  important  improvements.  These  are  incorporated 
.nto  the  present  work,  by  which  it  is  rendered  a  reliable  and 
permanent  text-book. 

In  one  important  particular  this  treatise  differs  from  all 
others  heretofore  published;  namely,  the  exercises  to  be 
w^ntten  by  the  pup.l  are  printed  in  phonetic  spellinff.*  Bv 
this   arrangement  three  important  advantages  are  gained: 

SILh  m"""7?  ^'  """^^  acquainted  with  the  philoso- 
phy and  utility  of  phonetic  spelling  as  applied  to  printing, 
and  w,ll  generally  be  so  well  pleased  withkasto  become  iS 
ardent  advocate.  Second;  in  writing  his  exercises  the  puj 
W.I1  be  enabled  to  transcribe  the  words  into  Phonography 
more  read.Iy,  for  learners  are  very  apt  to  !>e  troubled  bv  trv^ 

Zr.r'  n'"""^ ''""''■""' *''^''-  Phonographic  words  as 
the  old  spelhng  contains,  and  thus  make  blunders;  and,  from 
.nexper.ence  in  the  analysis  of  words,  there  is  grelt  liability 
of  inaccurate  vocalization;  but  by  writing  from  the  words 
pnnted  phonetically  both  of  these  difficulties  will  be  avoTled 
TW^^amilian^^  „,q„j^^j  ^;!^'l^^^ 

;vi,h  to  Kir" '»y  attention  to  Sryp;Vb„tTi«^  ^"^""^ 

iheTomauicedHion-.  thi.  a.  the  M-i'S^^V,  wh  oh  *vill  at   r^r'""*  "' 
in  tilling  orders,  unlos,  the  other  is  sp^ciS  """"•"'"  "'"ay's  be  sent, 


FWWWW* 


'•»»»**«»**»»»l 


»> 


ll|)IHHl)li„.ii»jillii?^  Ill, mil 


iiiiwciiniirifiqaa 


Hti^^lAArft*^ 


■** 


IV 


I'RKFAC'K. 


I 


be  of  service  to  the  phonojrraphic  student  hereafter,  in  ena- 
bling him  to  read  with  ease  such  phonetic  books  and  papers 
as  hfi  may  meet  with  elsewhere. 

In  support  of  the  utility  of  this  feature  wo  might  give  the 
testimony  of  scores  of  phonorrraphic  tcaclicrs  and  hundredn 
of  private  learners;  but  the  following  from  Henry  M.  Park- 
hurst,  the  distinguiahed  Congressional  Reporter,  will  suffice 
here:  "One  phonographer  thoroughly  imbued  with  the  spirit 
of  the  Spelling  Reform,  is  worth  more  than  a  dozen  who 
have  merely  taken  a  course  of  lessons.  Indeed,  I  rather 
think  uere  is  more  hope  of  a  man  who  has  never  hoard  of 
Phonography,  than  of  one  who  has  learned  it  without  learn- 
ing Phonotypy." 

Another  leading  feature  is  such  an  arrangement  of  the  les- 
sons that  no  word,  or  class  of  words,  is  required  to  be  written 
until  the  principle  has  been  explained  by  which  they   are 
written  in  their  most  approved  forms.     By  this  means,  the 
student  is  not  compelled  to  spend  his  time  in  learning  to 
write  certain  words,  and  then  suffer  the  discouragement  of 
having  to  drop  and  forget  the  forms  thus  learned,  and  famil- 
iarize himself  with  new   and  better  ones.     What  is  once 
learned  in  this  book,  remains  a  fixed  fact  with  the  pupil  in  all 
his  after  use  of  the  system.    There  are  hundreds  of  persons, 
who,  having  studied  Phonography  through  what  was  called 
the  "  learner's  style,"  have  not  yet  been  able  to  drop  it  and 
adopt  the  advanced  and  more  practical  style  of  writing;  but 
they  will  have  to  do  it  before  they  can  be  recognized  as  good 
phonographic  writers;  and  the  unlearning  of  their  present 
lengthy  and  awkward  forms  for  words,  added  to  the  new  forms 
they  r^ust  learn,  is  fully  equal  to  learning  the  system  from 

the  beginning. 

In  consequence  of  this  progressive  arrangement,  the  exer- 
cises to  be  written  necessarily  possess  an  imperfect  stylo  of 
composition.  And  the  words  in  each  exercise  being  confined 
as  much  as  possible  to  the  illustration  ot  the  principle  just 
introduced,  renders  necessary  a  resort  to  many  circuitous  ex- 


»»  ni I 


w^FWW^^^^f^^^* 


u 


™   '••#* 


wwiKwimffiSf^a 


Breaftor,  in  ena- 
loka  and  papers 

might  give  the 
TS  and  hundredrt 
Henry  M.  Park- 
ier, will  suffice 
i  with  the  spirit 
tn  a  dozen  who 
ndecd,  I  rather 
never  hoard  of 
it  without  learn- 

sment  of  the  les- 
red  to  be  written 
which  they  are 
r  this  means,  the 
le  in  learning  to 
Bcouragement  of 
irned,  and  famil- 
What  is  once 
th  the  pupil  in  all 
dreds  of  persons, 
what  was  called 
ble  to  drop  it  and 
le  of  writing;  but 
•cognized  as  good 
of  their  prpsent 
1  to  the  new  forms 
the  system  from 

rement,  the  exer- 
imperfect  stylo  of 
;ise  being  confined 
the  principle  just 
any  circuitous  ex- 


PRKFACK. 


pressions  for  the  development  of  an  idea;  this  harshness  and 
quaintness,  however,  diminishes  as  successive  lessons  are 
mastered. 

The  Review  at  the  close  of  each  lesson  is  a  new  feature, 
and  will  be  of  great  assistance  to  the  teacher,  especially  to 
the  ineiperienced,  in  questioning  his  class  as  to  what  they 
have  gone  over;  it  will  also  be  useful  to  the  private  learner, 
filling  the  place,  almost,  of  an  oral  instructor.  The  questions 
may  be  asked  the  class  either  collectively  or  individually;  the 
latter  is  generally  the  better  way.  It  would  be  well,  as  often 
as  convenient,  to  have  the  pupils  illustrate  their  answers  on 
the  black-board. 

Immediately  following  the  explanation  of  each  new  prin- 
ciple is  a  Heading,  Excrclee,  embracing,  as  much  as  possible, 
words  illustrative  of  the  preceding  text.  This  is  followed  by 
an  Exercise  for  Writing,  which  should  be  written  before  pro- 
gressing further,  while  the  manner  in  which  the  words  are  to 
bo  formed  are  fresh  in  the  mind.  Then,  at  the  close  of  each 
lesson,  is  a  general  Writing  Exercise,  embodying,  beside  tho 
principles  just  presented,  all  that  has  previously  been  learned. 
This  should  be  written  by  each  pupil,  during  the  interval  be- 
tween the  meetings  of  the  class;  and  at  the  next  recitation, 
the  pupils  should  exchange  their  manuscripts  with  each 
other,  and  then  read,  each  a  sentence  in  turn,  from  their 
written  exercises.  They  might  then  be  passed  to  the  teacher 
for  his  correction. 

The  author  would  acknowledge  his  indebtedness  to  the 
Phonographic  Class-book  of  Ank'ews  &  Boyle,  the  first  text- 
book of  the  system  ptiblishei'  in  America,  for  many  of  his 
most  appropriate  illustrations;  and  to  the  Phmographic  In- 
structor, by  James  C.  Boothe,  the  more  recent  work  generally 
used,  for  numerous  sentences,  and,  in  a  few  cases,  whole  par- 
agraphs of  exercises  for  reading  and  writing. 

For  the  expression  of  some  of  the  following  "Advantages 
of  Phonography,"  he  is  indebted  to  Prof.  Gouraud,  the  author 
of  a  work  but  little  known,  entitled  "Cosmo- Phonography:' 


"'"»» »» » T. 


WltltfiBWafWMWlMl  iiiwuit.  ;y. 


r 


...  — 


tifc<iA^<i^^^^A<i*******<>************^ 


L 


Phonogbaphy  has  been  defined  os  b  philosophical  method 
of  writing  the  English  language,  with  an  alphabet  composed 
of  the  simplest  geometrical  signs,  which  accurately  represent 
the  sounds  of  spoken  words.  It  may  bo  written  six  times  as 
fast  as  the  ordinary  longhand,  and  is  equally  legible.  Aside 
from  the  scientific  propriety  of  the  system,  as  made  manifest 
in  the  Introduction  which  follows,  the  following  practical 
advantages  are  worthy  of  consideration: 

1.  To  professors  of  scientific  and  literary  institutions— to 
gentlemen  of  the  bench  or  the  bar— to  legislators  in  the  halls 
of  representation— to  ministers  of  religion-to  lecturers  on 
the  various  arts  and  sciences -it  presents  the  most  invalu- 
able aid,  in  enabling  them  to  arrange,  condense,  and  fix  their 
thoughts,  facts,  arguments  and  proofs,  in  the  briefest  period 
of  time  and  the  shortest  possible  space,  presenting,  in  the 
condensed  schedule  of  a  small  pag''  <>■  f""  """^  complete  syn- 
opsis  of  their  most  elaborate  speeches,  orations,  or  discourses. 
•  2.  By  its  aid,  the  advocates  in  the  courts  of  justice  or  the 
halls  of  trial,  will  be  enabled  to  write,  with  ease  and  accu- 
racy,  either  the  full  depositions  of  important  witnesses,  or  the 
facts,  proofs,  evidences,  and  arguments  of  legal  opponents, 
and  thus  be  in  a  position,  not  only  to  meet  them  with  readi- 
ness and  strength,  but  eventually  to  thoroughly  overthrow 

and  refute  them.  . 

3.  The  student  in  the  halls  of  science  can  transcribe  with 
faithfulness,  and  preserve  in  the  smallest  compass,  the  valu- 
able lessons  of  professors,  and  thus  preserve,  for  the  medita- 
tion of  his  leisure  hours,  a  mmeded  w/w^e,  instead  of  broken, 
detached,  and  uncertain  fragments,  that  often  serve  to  con- 
fuse, bewilder,  or  perplex. 

4  Merchants,  and  clerks  of  mercantile  houses,  to  whom 
time  and  opaceare  really  a  desideratum,  will  find  Phonography 
a  most  invaluable  auxiliary;  as  the  ease  with  which  it  can 


v^rwv^^^'^*^^ 


y 


(vi) 


iiiiiMKtin  — 


*^ttA**A<MbA*' 


!5. 

sophical  method 
habct  composed 
irately  ropresont 
ten  six  timefl  as 
li'frible.  Aside 
A  made  manifest 
owing    practical 

■  institutions — to 
utors  in  the  halls 
-to  lecturers  on 
:he  most  invalu- 
nse,  and  fix  their 
3  briefest  period 
Bsenting,  in  the 
id  complete  syn- 
ms,  or  discourses, 
of  justice  or  the 
1  ease  and  accu- 
witnesses,  or  the 
legal  opponents, 
:hem  with  readi- 
ughly  overthrow 

1  transcribe  with 
)m  pass,  the  valu- 
;,  for  the  medita- 
istead  of  broken, 
,n  aerve  to  con- 
houses,  to  whom 
ind  Phonography 
ith  which  it  can 


»»W»**^T*»'^'»^^^ 


'"sl 


k*A>lbi<aMiA****«i*AAAA^MAAA**A«ift***<h* 


I 


AnVANTAOKS   Of    PIlONOdllAPIIY. 


VII 


be  learned  and  acquired,  and  the  facility  and  readiness  with 
which  it  can  bo  written  and  reail,  will  enable  them  to  tran- 
scribe their  accountn,  to  note  their  memoranda,  to  pout  up 
their  bills,  and  even  to  conduct  their  correspondence,  in  less 
than  0He-yf/i!;»  of  the  ordinary  time,  and  in  a  considerable  re- 
duction of  the  ordinary  space;  and  as  "  time  is  money,"  it 
presents  to  them  indeed  a  most  invaluable  guin. 

5.  To  the  author,  editor,  or  general  writer— to  the  orator, 
legislator,  or  minister— how  invaluable  must  it  be,  when  they 
reflect  how  many  of  their  most  brilliant  thoughts  and  most 
glowing  conceptions,  how  many  of  the  mont  sparkling  gems 
of  their  imaginations  and  the  most  radiant  pearls  of  their 
thoughts,  that  in  moments  of  genius  and  enthusiasm  flash 
like  electric  sparks  from  the  mind,  are  forever  lost  for  the 
want  of  some  Daguerrean  process,  like  the  one  we  present, 
to  catch  and  transfix  them  on  the  wing,  recording  them  on 
the  glowing  page  in  all  the  freshness,  vigor,  and  brilliancy  of 
their  first  conception,  as  rapidly  as  they  ore  presented  to  the 
mind!  and  for  the  lack  of  which,  alas!  like  the  dazzling  flash 
of  the  evanescent  meteor,  they  fade  and  expire  as  rapidly  as 
they  are  kindled,  and  leave  but  the  indistinct  memory  of  their 
trace  behind. 

6.  A  practical  acquaintance  with  this  art  is  highly  favor- 
able to  the  improvement  of  the  mind,  invigorating  all  its  fac- 
ulties, and  drawing  forth  all  iu  resources.  The  close  atten- 
tion  requisite  in  following  the  voice  of  the  speaker  (in  report- 
ing) induces  habits  of  patience,  perseverance  and  watchful- 
ness, which  will  gradually  extend,  till  they  form  habits  that 
will  be  found  useful  through  life.  The  close  attention  to  the 
words  and  thoughts  of  the  speaker  which  is  necessary  in 
writing  them  down,  will  naturally  have  a  tendency  to  endue 
the  mind  with  quickness  of  apprehension  and  distinctness  of 
perception,  whereby  the  judgment  v:\V  he  strengthened  and 
the  taste  refined. 

7.  The  memory  is  also  improved  by  the  practice  of  Pho- 
nography.    The  necessity  for  the  writer  to  retain  in   his 


i w^^^^vw 


h^A^^a  >  >•< 


Till 


ADVANTAOKH   OF    I'lliiNouUAIMIV. 


mind  the  limt  sentonco  of  the  HpeaktT,  whilo  lio  U  MtcndiiiK 
at  th«  unint' tiini' to  whiit  t'i)lli)wn,  ntui  nln<)  to  pfniiiii(f  down 
hi*  wordH,  imi»«t  lie  hij,'hly  Ix-ru-tifiiil  to  thut  liiciiliy.  wliich  in 
more  tlioii  any  othor  improved  by  excrclie.  It  drawa  out 
Biiil  iinprovt'H  all  the  fiicuitu -<  ol'tlu'  mind. 

"rhoiin?;rnpliy,"  niiyn  M.-^«im.  Fowi.kus  &  \VKr,i,«,  "wp  rf- 
(fnnl  im  oiio  id'  tlif  ino.tt  iinportiint  iiivcntiotix  of  thi-  ii(ff,  and 
one  which  whoiild  he  o|m  ii  to  i-vi-ry  piTHoii  dfninmn  of  hfiiijf 
coiirtiilcrcd  nliiciitrd.  A«  ii  nyHtciii  of  rc|M>rtiMi{.  ^.-m-riil  cor- 
rt'itpoiidi'iiciMiiKl  mcmoriiiul.i,  it  in  uiipiirnlli'lfil  in  iiHffulnt'HH. 
In  cliirojrniphy,  it  in  wliut  tin' ti'li'^tnipliH  lire  in  ii^ji'iicioH  fur 
tranHniittini;  thounlit.  \Vt!  employ  ihri-c  rcporti-rs,  one  in 
our  olfifc  nii'l  two  whotriivol  with  U'cturi-rn  from  onr  houni'. 
In  Ifii  miniili^  wo  ciin  diitiito  iin  iirliclo  for  puhliciition  which 
wo  could  not  coinpoHo  and  write  in  two  hour*;  hewidi-a  it  con- 
tains more  Bpirit  and  frcnlincnH  thun  if  luhorcd  fhrou;fh  ntfhi' 
slow  pace  of  ordinary  compowition.  Every  Bcholar  should  by 
all  miian»  learn  it." 

ProfesHor  Mart,  Principal  of  the  Philadelphia  High  School, 
says:  "  Phonography  has  been  introduced  into  this  institu- 
tion two  years  and  a  half,  and  has  been  learned  by  about 
four  hundred.  Two  hundred  are  studyiiiff  it  now.  It  is  one 
of  the  regular  branches  of  the  course,  being  attended  to  three 
times  a  week  during  the  whole  of  the  first  year.  Had  I  not 
supposed  it  to  be  of  much  practical  value,  I  should  not  have 
urged  its  introduction,  a  measure  which  I  have  seen  no  occa- 
sion to  regret.  Such  of  ourstudcnis  as  have  made  Phono- 
graphic Reporting  a  profession,  have  got  along  in  life  faster, 
by  all  odds,  than  those  in  any  other  kind  of  business,  and 
that  without  the  possession  of  any  special  brilliancy  of  tal- 
enU.  Some  of  them,  not  yet  turned  twenty,  are  now  mak- 
ing more  money  by  Phonographic  Reportinj;  than  the  Princi- 
pal of  the  High  School,  after  having  given  himself  for  more 
than  twenty  years  to  his  profession." 

Said  the  Hon.  Thomus  Benton:  "  Had  this  art  been  known 
forty  years  ago,  it  would  have  saved  me  twenty  years  of 
hard  labor." 

"  It  Is  my  humble  opinion  that  it  will  eventually  supersede 
the  present  system  of  writing,  as  the  steam  carriage  train 
supersedes  the  old  eight  inch  wheeled  wagon."— ifw.  Dunbar. 

Such  are  the  tendencies  of  the  art  this  book  is  designed  to 
unfold. 


r 
a 


i»»»^w*»*»»<»*^***»*'**^'^^'^»''"'^^^^^'^^'^^^'^'^^' 


II Y. 


ho  ii  Mtendinff 
(  ponii'mK  "lown 
hculiy,  wliich  i" 
).     It  draws   out 


Wki.i.s,  "wp  n- 
t  1)1'  till'  iigt".  mid 
I'simuH  of  l)t'iii>f 
iiiK,  ({I'ni'riil  for- 
I'd  in  iixcl'uliifHH, 

in  iiiji'iu'ii'H  fur 
•f|nirti>r»,  OIK'  in 

Irnui  <>nr  Iiouhi'. 
uhlii'uiitin  which 
i;  bi'itidcH  it  con- 
t'd tliroujih  nlthe 
ichulur  nhould  by 

phia  High  School, 

into  tliis   itiBtitu- 

eurnod  by  about 

t  now.     It  Ih  one 

attended  to  three 

^(<ar.     Hiid  I  not 

nhouhl   not  have 

ive  Been  no  occa- 

ivo  made   Phono- 

ng  in  life  faster, 

of  biwines8,  and 

brilliancy  of  t«l- 

:y,  aro  now  mak- 

r  than  the  Princi- 

himself  for  more 

art  been  known 
twenty  years  of 

ntually  supersede 
am  carriage  train 
n."—Sev.  Dunbar. 
>ok  is  designed  to 


^^**^^'»»* 


Snfrobiution. 


|1rogreM  of  Improbtmcnt.  —  Within  the  last  hundred 
years  important  changes  have  taken  place  in  almost  every 
department  of  imluMtry.  The  mnchanio  no  longer  seeks  the 
swiftly  running  stream  to  propel  his  machinery,  but  erects 
his  mill  or  factory  on  ground  the  most  convenient  for  labor 
or  for  market,  and  brings  the  elements  into  subjection  for  the 
performance  of  his  drudgery;  the  stage- coach  horse- power, 
for  locomotion,  is  almost  forgotten  in  consideration  of  the 
iron-boned  steed  hitched  to  the  enormous  wheeled-palace  ; 
the  sea-voyage  of  weary  months  is  now  performed  pleasantly 
in  as  many  weeks,  by  the  application  of  stoam  to  navigation; 
and  the  man  of  business  no  longer  waits  the  rapid  trans- 
mission  of  thought  by  such  conveyance,  but  communicates 
through  the  length  and  breadth  of  our  wide-spreading  co  in- 
try  with  lightning  speed. 

Thus  the  genius  of  invention  and  improvement  has  been 
abroad  in  the  land,  and  although  for  a  long  time  she  roiifi'^^ncl 
her  skill  to  building  steamboats  and  making  railroads,  con- 
structing machinery  and  teaching  the  lightning  how  to  talk, 
she  has  not  altogether  forgotten  the  world  of  intellect ;  and 
Phonoorapht,  her  last,  most  promising  and  beneficent  boon, 
presents  to  the  world  an  alphabet  of  letters  so  simple  and 
facile  that  he  who  uses  it  may  readily  keep  pace  with  the 
fastest  speaker, — affording  a  system  of  writing  as  much  supe- 
rior to  that  of  the  old  script  alphabet,  as  railroads  are  to  the 
ancient  truck-wheeled  wagon,  or  the  electric  telegraph  to  the 
post  boy's  plodding  gait. 


J 


10 


INTRODUCTION    TO   THE 


"  Our  living  floclta  of  thoughts  need  no  longer  trudge  it 
slowly  and  wcurily  down  the  pen  and  along  the  paper,  hin- 
dering each  other  as  they  struggle  through  tho  strait  gate  of 
the  old-hand  writing;  our  troops  of  feelings  need  no  more 
crawl,  as  snails  crawl,  to  their  station  on  the  page;  regiment 
after  regiment  may  now  trot  hriskly  forward,  to  fill  paragraph 
after  paragraph:  and  writing, once  a  trouble,  is  now  at  breath- 
ing-ease. Our  kind  and  loving  thoughts,  warm  and  trans- 
parent, liquid  as  melted  irom  the  hot  heart,  shall  no  longer 
grow  opaque,  and  freeze  with  a  tedious  dribbling  from  the 
pen;  but  the  whole  soul  may  now  pour  itself  forth  in  a  sweet 
shower  of  words.  Phonotypy  and  Phonography  will  be  of  a 
use  in  the  weld  not  dreamt  of,  but  by  a  few." — 2'/»e  jEoangel 
of  Jjoue,  p.  231,  by  Henbt  Sotton. 

We  do  not  wish  to  underrate  the  value  of  the  present  sys- 
tem of  writing;  it  has  been  of  great  service  in  its  time,  hav- 
ing done  much  in  the  way  of  civilizing  and  enlightening  the 
races  of  men.  But  the  state  of  things  in  the  scientific 
world  demanded  a  change  in  the  character  of  our  written 
language.  Science  is  a  stern  ruler;  her  laws  encircle  every 
art,  and  although  for  a  long  time  they  may  remain  undiscov- 
ered or  not  applied,  yet  as  the  world  progresses  in  knowledi^e 
and  learns  wisdom  from  experience,  it  will  cause  them  to  be 
developed,  and  future  generations  will  derive  the  advantages 
of  conforming  to  them.  These  facts  have  been  illustrated  in 
the  various  improvements  to  which  we  have  alluded;  and 
they  are  still  to  be  expected  in  such  departments  as  have  not 
yet  undergone  the  remodeling  process  of  modern  ingenuity. 
They  take  their  turn  in  the  great  circle  of  progression;  and 
it  is  the  object  of  the  present  work  to  demonstrate  the  laws 
that  apply  to  the  art  of  writing,  as  required  at  this  stcge  of 
the  world's  history. 

The  spirit  of  our  age  demands  two  new  features  in  the  art 
of  writing  :  First,  Speed  in  its  execution;  second,  System  in  its 
orthography.     In  treating  of  the  first  desideratum   we  shall 


?». 


hAAAAAA*A***tfak^kAf 


no  longer  trudge  it 
ong  the  paper,  hin- 
i  the  strait  gate  of 
ing8  need  no  more 
the  page;  regiment 
rd,  to  fill  paragraph 
le,  is  now  at  breath- 
i,  warm  and  trans- 
rt,  shall  no  longer 
dribbling  from  the 
jlf  forth  in  a  sweet 
graphy  will  be  of  a 
few." — T/ie  Eoangel 

of  the  present  sys- 
ice  in  its  time,  hav> 
id  enlightening  the 
s  in  the  scientific 
:ter  of  our  written 
laws  encircle  every 
Y  remain  undiscuv- 
■esses  in  knowlediQ;e 
1  cause  them  to  be 
ive  the  advantages 
J  been  illustrated  in 

have  alluded;  and 
tments  as  have  not 

modern  ingenuity, 
if  progression;  and 
nonstrate  the  laws 
3d  at  this  stcge  of 

features  in  the  art 
econd,  System  in  its 
deratum   we  shall 


>****AA«>fe*«^abrtri^i*Aa 


■*A*A*****>h^d 


MANUAL    OF    PHONOORAPHV. 


11 


briefly  refer  to   the   alphabet,  now  in  use,  and  the   habits  of 
writing  it  requires. 

©be  ([i)l&  gilpljabct  rmts  (DrlbogntplTn,— Like  the  ancient 
implements  of  industry  and  modes  of  labor,  the  alphabet 
of  our  fathers,  was  constructed  at  a  time  when  the  inge- 
nuity of  man  had  not  been  brought  into  full  play.  The 
letters  are  complex,  and  the  use  of  them  cumbersome  in  the 
extreme.  To  illustrate:  take  the  letter /for  example;  to 
make  this  letter,  the  fingers  have  to  perform  four  inflections 
or  movements,  while  it  represents  but  a  simple  sound;  in 
making  the  letter  m  seven  inflections  are  required,  while  it, 
too,  represents  but  one  sound;  and  every  letter  of  the  old  al- 
phabet is  thus  complex,  to  a  greater  or  less  degree,  although 
they  are  designed  each  to  represent  but  a  single  sound. 

Now,  while  there  is  this  complexity  in  the  art  of  writing, 
in  spoken  language  the  organs  of  speech  perform  but  one 
movement  in  the  enunciation  of  each  letter;  and  hence  the 
labor  of  the  penman  is  four  or  five  times  as  great  as  that  of 
the  speaker;  while  the  latter  is  moving  off  freely,  as  on  the 
wings  of  the  wind,  the  former  is  trudging  at  the  snail's  pace, 
weary  and  provoked  at  the  contrast. 

The  object  to  be  accomplished,  therefore,  is  to  present  an 
alphabet  each  letter  of  which  can  be  written  by  one  inflec- 
tion of  the  pen,  so  that  the  writer  need  no  longer  be  four 
times  distanced  by  the  moderate  speaker;  and  if  the  reader 
will  follow  us  through  this  book,  he  will  see  that  the  system 
we  are  about  to  develop  more  than  meets  this  requisition. 

But  a  greater  difficulty,  if  possible,  than  the  mere  substitu 
tion  of  a  new  alphabet,  is  to  be  overcome.  The  orthography 
employed  in  using  the  old  alphabet  is  nearly  as  cumbrous  as 
the  formation  of  its  letters;  while  its  want  of  system  makes 
it  a  study  of  many  years  to  memorize  the  spelling  of  the  fifty 
or  eighty  thousand  words  in  our  language. 

Thus,  take  the  sound  of  a;  if  we  had  nothing  to  do,  in  order 
to  represent  it  in  our  common  writing,  but  to  write  the  one 
letter  called  a,  the  evil  would  be  trifling  compared  with  what 


^^f^^^rmmft 


?rV*^»B8*'*'*-'«*«*»*  A 


y^^iblMhAAAAA 


12 


--lint i**^ 

INTRODUCTION    TO    THE 


kArf>A*A*AAi**AMA***. 


it  is.  But  we  more  frequently  have  to  write  two  or  three,  or 
even  four  letters  to  represent  this  one  sound.  It  has,  in  fact, 
thirty-four  different  modes  of  representation,  consisting  of 
various  combinations  of  nine  diflerent  letters,  a'  few  only  of 
which  we  have  room  to  exhibit.  Thus,  aa,  as  in  ^aron;  at, 
as  in  potn;  ajjf,  as  in  campajjrn;  aigh,  as  in  stra^At;  eighe, 
as  in  weighed,  &c.  Now  common  sense,  as  well  ae  the  laws 
of  science,  suggests  that  the  sound  of  a  in  each  and  all  these 
should  be  written  with  the  same  letter.  When  this  shall 
be  done,  more  than  two  thirds  of  the  labor  of  representing 
this  sound  will  be  saved;  but  by  substituting  a  new  letter  that 
can  be  made  with  one  movement  of  the  pen  instead  of  the 
four  that  a  requires,  and  of  the  four  times  four  that  several  of 
the  above  combinations  require,  nine-tenths  of  this  labor  will 
be  avoided.  In  writing  the  sound  a  in  these  five  words,  in- 
stead of  making^iy  inflections  of  the  pen,  we  will  have  to 
make  but /ye.' 

The  sound  of  e  is  represented  \nfort)j  different  ways.  Ex- 
amples: ea,  as  in  each;  ea-ue  as  in  league;  eye,  as  in  keyed; 
eig,  as  in  eeignor;  eiyli,  as  in  heigh.  We  need  not  repeat  that 
the  sound  of  e  in  each  of  these  words  should  be  repre- 
sented by  the  same  letter;  or  that  by  substituting  for  the 
complex  letter  e  a  simple  character  that  can  be  made  with 
one  motion  of  the  pen,  seven-eights  or  nine-tenths  of  the  la- 
bor  in  writing  would  be  saved.  These  are  facts  that  are  evi- 
dent,'after  the  illustrations  are  presented.  And  we  might 
thus  illustrate  the  unscientific  mode  of  representing  nearly 
every  word  in  our  language,  with  equally  formidable  resulU. 
But  we  will  only  state  the  melancholy  fact,  that  the  various 
sounds  employed  in  speaking  the  English  language  are  each 
represented  in  from  four  to  forty  ways,  and  that  in  the  large 
majority  of  cases  two  or  more  letters  are  required  to  do  the 
service.  It  is  also  true,  that  there  is  no  letter  in  the  alpha- 
bet that  uniformly  represents  the  same  sound;  thus,  a  has  a 
different  sound  in  each  of  the  following  words  :  ate,  at,  all, 
are,  any. 


,■ 


Wm 


tBOitfaesamttmsmimmsfi 


Bwnafct 


ite  two  or  three,  or 
1(1.  It  has,  in  fact, 
tion,  coDsiatiiig  of 
ters,  a'  few  only  of 
»,  as  in  ^aron;  at, 
8  in  Btra^^t;  eighe, 
as  well  ae  the  laws 
1  each  and  all  these 
When  this  shall 
3or  of  representing 
ng  a  new  letter  that 
3  pen  instead  of  the 
1  four  that  several  of 
hs  of  this  labor  will 
hese  five  words,  in- 
en,  we  will  have  to 

lifferent  ways.  Ex-  ^ . 
ue;  eye,  as  in  keyed; 
need  not  repeat  that 
ds  should  be  repre- 
substituting  for  the 
t  can  be  made  with 
ine-tenths  of  the  la- 
re  facts  that  are  evi- 
ed.  And  we  might 
representing  nearly 
'  formidable  results, 
ict,  that  the  various 
h  language  are  each 
nd  that  in  the  lar^e 
I  required  to  do  the 
letter  in  the  alpha- 
sound;  thus,  a  has  a 
g  words  :  ate,  at,  all, 


bA*AAAAAAA< 


MANUAL    OP    PHONOORAPUY. 


13 


I 


The  consequence  of  this  want  of  system  is,  in  the  lan- 
guage of  a  distinguished  writer  on  the  subject  of  education, 
that  "  reading  is  the  most  difficult  of  human  attainments." 
And,  as  a  further  consequence,  one  third  of  the  population  of 
England  are  unable  to  read,  and  one  liaJf  unable  to  write; 
while  in  the  United  States,  the  number  of  adult  white  per- 
sons who  can  neither  read  nor  write,  is  one  to  every  twenty 
who  can;  and  this  wide-spread  ignorance  must  continue  until 
the  rudiments  of  education  are  simplified.  Such  inconsisten- 
cies and  mischievous  errors  as  we  have  referred  to,  are  not 
in  harmony  with  the  developments  of  order  and  science  in 
most  other  branches  of  industry  and  art,  and  hence  they 
must  be  superseded  by  something  truer  and  more  expedi- 
tious; or,  if  not  superseded,  we  must  use  the  more  speedy  and 
economical  system  in  connection  with  the  old,  as  steamboats, 
railroads  and  telegraphs  are  used  conjointly  with  the  old 
modes  of  conveyance. 

Cljt  ^bonttit  iprinttplt.  —  The  term  Phmetie  is  derived 
from  the  Greek  word  tuvi;  speech.  A  phonetic  alphabet, 
therefore,  is  one  which,  referring  solely  to  speech,  derives  all 
its  laws  from  a  consideration  of  the  elements  of  speech.  To 
illustrate  what  we  mean  by  the  phrase  "elements  of  speech," 
we  have  but  to  ask  the  reader  to  adjust  his  lips  to  a  round 
position  and  deliver  the  voice  as  he  would  commence  to 
speak  the  words  ode,  oak,  own.  Now  this  same  sound  is  heard 
in  thousands  of  words  in  our  language,  and  is  what  wo  call 
an  element  of  speech.  Another  element  is  heard  in  the 
commencement  of  the  word  ooee  and  at  the  termination  of 
the  word  who.  In  pronouncing  the  words  see,  say,  saw,  so,  we 
hear,  at  the  beginning  of  each  of  them,  the  same  kind  of  a 
sound,  namely  a  hiss,  which  is  also  an  element  of  speech,  for 
it  frequently  combines  with  other  sounds  to  make  words. 
By  analyzing  all  the  words  in  the  English  language,  it  has 
been  found  that  it  is  constituted  of  but  forty-three  elemen- 
tary sounds  or,   to    be    more    precise,  thirty-nine    simple 


III "r.T".T7T7 


» 


14 


INTRODUCTION    TO    TlIK 


Bounds,  and  four  compound  ones,  formed  by  the  close  union 
of  certain  simple  sounds,  which  it  is  convenient  to  consider 
as  elements.  In  speaking,  therefore,  our  words  consist 
simply  in  the  utterance  of  one  of  these,  or  a  combination  of 
two  or  more  of  them:  and  in  writing  these  words,  common 
sense  would  suggect  that  each  element  should  be  represented 
by  a  single  letter,  that  should  never  stand  for  any  other 
sound. 

It  is  supposed  the  original  Phoenician  alphabet,  from  which 
our  present  alphabet  is  remotely  derived,  was  phonetic;  that 
is,  it  represented  the  elements  of  speech  in  such  a  manner 
that  when  the  sounds  of  a  word  were  heard  the  writer  knew 
immediately  what  letters  to  use,  and  when  he  saw  the  letters 
he  knew  at  once  what  sounds  he  was  to  utter.  But  when 
this  alphabet  was  adopted  by  the  Greeks  and  Romans,  who 
used  sounds  unknown  to  the  Phoenicians,  many  of  the  old 
letters  were  necessarily  used  to  represent  new  sounds  as  well 
as  old  ones,  so  that  there  was  no  longer  any  very  strict  ac- 
cordance between  the  sounds  and  letters  of  words.  But 
when  other  European  nations,  including  the  English,  adopted 
the  romanic  alphabet,  and  used  it  in  very  different  ways,  inso- 
much that  no  one  could  guess  what  sound  should  be  attributed 
to  any  one  letter,  almost  all  trace  of  the  phonetic  nature  of 
the  alphabet  was  lost.  And  hence  the  deplorable  state  of 
English  spelling  and  writing,  as  depicted  in  previous  pages, 
which,  in  few  words,  is  so  bad  that  no  one  can  tell  the 
sound  of  an  unknown  woni  from  its  spelling,  or  the  spelling 
of  a  new  word  from  its  sound. 

Phonetic  spelling,  therefore,  is  no  new  thing,  and  the 
efforts  of  writing  and  spelling  reformers  is  simply  an  attempt 
to  place  the  representation  of  the  English  language  on  the 
same  rational  basis  that  the  most  classic  of  the  ancient  lan- 
guages stood,  and  in  addition  thereto  to  afford  the  means  of 
the  most  rapid  writing  that  it  is  possible  to  attain.  No  fur- 
ther argument,  therefore,  should  be  required,  in  presenting  a 
system  so  accordant  with  truth  and  utility. 


^A>..^....^^. 


y  the  close  union 
renicnt  to  consider 
our  words  consist 
>r  a  combination  of 
ise  words,  common 
juld  be  represented 
and  for  any  other 

phabet,  from  which 

vas  phonetic;  that 

in  such  a  manner 

ird  the  writer  knew 

he  saw  the  letters 

utter.     But  when 

and  Romans,  who 

3,  many  of  the  old 

new  sounds  as  well 

any  very  strict  ac- 

rs  of   words.      But 

le  English,  adopted 

lifferent  ways,  inso- 

shouldbe  attributed 

phonetic  nature  of 

deplorable  state  of 

in  previous  pages, 

one  can   tell   the 

ng,  or  the  spelling 

jw  thing,  and  the 
simply  an  attempt 
h  language  on  the 
if  the  ancient  Ian- 
fTord  the  means  of 
:o  attain.  No  fur- 
'ed,  in  presenting  a 





MANUAI.    OP   PUONOGRAPUV. 


P^OitotgpiT. — The  word  Phonotypy,  from  the  Greek  t"»'>7» 
speech,  and  rurto;,  type,  signifies  the  printing  of  language  by 
types  which  represent  the  sounds  heard  in  speaking;  while 
Phonography,  also  from  ^uvrj  and  another  Greek  word, 
y^a^ijv,  to  writp,  signifies  to  write  by  sound,  or  with  charac- 
ters that  represent  the  sounds  heard  in  speech.  Although  the 
latter  is  the  art  which  this  work  is  specially  designed  to  ex. 
plain,  yet  a  knowledge  of  the  former  will  materially  aid  in  its 
acquisition;  and  as  a  sufficient  acquaintance  with  it  may  be 
obtained  in  a  few  minutes'  study,  we  shall  here  present  a 
brief  exposition  of  it. 

The  forty-three  elementary  and  dipthongal  sounds  that  it 
has  been  found  necessary  to  represent  in  a  true  orthography 
of  the  English  language,  are  exhibited  by  the  italic  letters  in 
the  following  words  : — 


eel 


earth         ale         air 
ill  ell  am 

«ce,         ml,         owl, 
pole,     Jowl,      <oe,      doe, 
/ear,      veer,      thigh,    thy, 
rare,      lull;      mam,      nun, 


all 
on 
yea. 
Jeer, 
zeal. 


oak        ooze; 
up       wood; 
way,     Aay ; 
came,      ^ame, 
s/iall,      viaion. 


arm 
ask 
mute; 
cAeer, 
5eal, 
sin^. 

Of  course  the  old  twenty-six  letter  alphabet  was  incompe- 
tent to  give  a  character  for  each  of  these  forty-three  sounds. 
And  in  determining  upon  the  introduction  of  new  letters,  two 
important  considerations  presented  themselves  to  the  mind, 
both  grounded  on  the  fact  that  the  romanic  style  of  spelling 
already  existed  in  printed  books,  and  flourishes  w  herever  our 
language  is  spoken  or  read.  First,  that  those  who  can  al- 
ready read  romanic  spelling  should  have  very  little  difficulty 
in  acquiring  phonetic  spelling;  and  secondly,  that  those  who 
are  taught  to  read  phonetically  should  find  that  the  greater 
part  of  the  difficulties  attendant  on  the  acquirement  of  ro- 
manic reading  were  then  overcome. 

In  order  to  accomplish  these  two  very  important  objects,  it 
was  necessary  to  use  as  many  of  the  old  romanic  letters  as 


'»»»»»» » m,  ,^^ 


h^k*ikA*<h******A<h***4 


h*A*«^*«M*^i*^ 


16 


INTRODUCTION    TO    TUB 


possible,  in  the  senses  which  they  most  frequently  have  in 
the  rumanic  spelling  of  £n<rlish;  and  to  ninke  the  new  pho- 
netic letters  suggest  the  letters  or  combiuatians  of  letters 
which  are  most  frequently  employed  to  express  their  sounds 
romanicaliy. 

The  grand  object  was  to  make  English  reading  easy — not 
merely  in  phonetic  but  also  in  romanic  spelling,  in  order  that 
the  large  number  of  books  already  printed  should  bo  still  use- 
ful, or  rather  should  be  made  useful  to  those  to  whom  they  are 
at  present  useless — the  book-blind,  those  who  cannot  read. 
This  has  been  effected.  Not  only  is  phonetic  reading  so  ea«y  to 
those  who  read  romanicaliy  that  few  find  any  difficulty  in 
the  matter  at  all,  but  those  who  have  only  learned  to  read 
phonetically  occupy  the  same  position  in  regard  to  romanic 
reading. 

Out  of  the  twenty-six  romanic  letters,  three,  c,  q,  x,  have 
been  rejected.     The  fifteen  consonants, 

bdfhjlmnprtvwyz 
are  ubed  in  their  usual  romanic  sense;  that  is,  in  the  sense 
which  the  English   romanic    reader  would  naturally  expect 
them  to  have  in  any  new  word,  as  they  are  pronounced  at  the 
beginning  of  the  romanic  words, 

6ed,       deed,      /it,     heai,       jeai,       IM,      man,       nun, 
peep,        rare,     <oe,       vote,      woe,      yes,        seal, 

The  five  vowels,  a,  e,  i,  o,  u,  and  the  remaining  three  con- 
sonants k,  g,  s,  are  to  be  pronounced  as  at  the  beginning  of 
om,     egg,      in,     on,      up,     kite,     get,     «ip. 

New  letters  hove  been  invented  for  the  sounds  expressed 
by  the  italic  letters  in  the  under-written  words  in  the  follow- 
ing tablej 

A^     flq     (la   Ge    Oo 

air     arm       ask    all      oak 


Ce    Ef    Ha 

eel   earth   age 

(Jo   ISv      Uh 
oil      owl       ni?'le 


catch 


thin 


</tine 


(Do)    Uu    *i 
ooze     toot     tee 

ihe      Vi.  ion      sin^ 


P 


i>i  iiiirtMiMwrniii  H»H'" 


( 

J 

6 

C 

c 

J 

s 

a 

6 


UK 

It  frequently  have  in 

tniikc  the  new  pho- 

mbiuatians  of  letters 

express  their  sounds 

ish  reading  easy — not 
jpulling,  in  order  that 
ed  should  bo  still  use- 
oae  to  whom  they  are 
ISO  who  cannot  read, 
tic  reading  so  eany  to 
find  any  difficulty  in 
snly  learned  to  read 
in  regard  to  romanic 

rs,  three,  c,  q,  x,  have 

w  y  z 

that  is,  in  the  sense 
)uld  naturally  expect 
are  pronounced  at  the 

laW,  man,  nnn, 
,       ^es,        seal, 

remaining  three  con- 
at  the  beginning  of 

e,     get,     mp. 

the  sounds  expressed 
words  in  the  foUow- 

Oo  (Dm  tJu  *i 
oak    ooze     toot     tee 

!      she      Vu  ion 


fci' 


t •  '■"-•"' •'j^v^jiL*:! 


INTKODUCTION   TO    TriR 


On  the  preceding  pnge  the  whole  ulphabet  is  presented, 
systematicQlly  arranged;  first,  tiio  long  vowels;  second,  the 
short  voweU;  third,  the  compound  vowels;  fourth,  the  liquids; 
fifth,  the  consonants.  In  this  respect,  unimportant  though 
it  may  seem,  the  now  alphabet  is  an  improvement  on  the  old 
—which  is  little  more  than  a  string  of  confusion— hero  a 
vowel  and  there  a  vowel,  a  consonant  here  and  another  there. 

In  uJdition  to  the  printing  letters  of  the  phonetic  alphabet, 
the  longhand  script  characters  are  presented.  It  will  be  ob- 
served, that  the  old  letters  ore  retained  in  their  usual  sense, 
and  new  ones  introduced,  having  resemblance  to  their  cor- 
responding printed  letters,  and  of  as  easy  formation  as  possi- 
ble. This  alphabet  is  used  by  all  practical  Spelling  Reform- 
ers, where  the  pliouelic  lihorthand  could  not  be  read  by  the 
person  for  whom  the  writing  is  done;  for  phonetic  longhand 
may  be  read,  with  very  little  hesitation,  by  all  who  can  read 
the  old  manuscript.  And  the  writer,  in  addition  to  the  satis- 
faction of  employing  a  scientific  orthography,  economizes 
twelve  per  cent  of  his  paper  and  time,  by  dispensing  with 
double  letters,  etc. 

^^onograp^g. — Phonography  being  intended  for  the  pen 
alone,  and  the  principal  object  being  rapidity  of  execution, 
with  a  reliable  degree  of  legibility,  considerable  license  is 
taken  as  regards  strictly  phonetic  principles.  It  cannot  be 
said  of  phonetic  shorthand  that  "no  sound  must  bo  represent- 
ed by  more  than  one  sign,"  and  that  "no  sign  must  represent 
more  than  one  sound."  The  reverse  of  this  statement  is  true 
in  frequent  instances;  but  not  in  such  a  way  as  materially  to 
impair  the  scientific  accuracy  of  the  system.  In  point  of 
utility  there  are  great  advantages  derived  from  having  two  or 
three  formw  to  represent  certain  sounds,  and  no  serious  dis- 
advantage. 

The  simplest  signs  which  it  was  possible  to  obtain  for  the 
phonographic  alphabet,  arc,  1st,  the  dot;  2d,  the  dash;  3d,  the 
atraiglU  line;  4th,  the  curve.     The  dots  and  dashes  are  used  to 


f( 

P 
a 

t\ 

t) 

P 

t\ 
ei 
n 

CI 

cl 
al 
in 
th 
wi 
fn 
fe 
th 
ha 
rei 

be 
sei 
pr( 
th( 


q 


-■■--•  ^tA^A^i*^*^*^*** 


THE 


alphabet  is  presented, 
g  vowels;  second,  the 
bIs;  fourth,  the  liquids; 
t,  unimportant  though 
proveinent  on  the  old 
of  confusion — hero  a 
lere  ond  another  there, 
the  phonetic  alphabet, 
sented.  It  will  be  ob- 
d  in  their  usual  sense, 
mblance  to  their  cor- 
isy  formation  as  possi- 
tical  Spelling  Reform- 
Id  not  be  read  by  the 
for  phonetic  longhand 
a,  by  all  who  can  read 
in  addition  to  the  satis- 
;hography,  economizes 
le,  by  dispensing  with 


intended  for  the  pen 
rapidity  of  execution, 
lonsiderable  license  is 
nciples.  It  cannot  be 
and  must  bo  represent- 
no  sign  must  represent 
f  this  statement  is  true 
a  way  as  materially  to 
3  system.  In  point  of 
red  from  having  two  or 
ds,  and  no  serious  dis- 

ssible  to  obtain  for  the 
ot;  2d,  the  dash;  3d,  the 
ind  dashes  are  used  to 


'*"* '  "l^J-JllJi'l±LLil 


MANUAL   OF   PIIONOORAPIIY. 


10 


represent  the  vowels;  the  straight  lines  and  curves  represent 
the  consonants.  The  following  diagrams  exhibit  the  sou'ce 
from  which  the  latter  are  derived,  and  show  the  diflerent  posi- 
tions they  occupy  in  representing  diflerent  letters. 


y^J 


It  will  be  observed  that  the  straight  line  assumen  four  dif- 
ferent  positions,  and  the  cur/ed  one  eight;  these  are  as  many 
positions  as  can  he  recognized  without  danger  of  confusion; 
and  these  two  simple  characters  can  be  written  in  these 
twelve  positions  so  as  to  be  just  as  distinct  and  legible  aa 
though  this  number  of  differently  shaped  letters  were  em- 
ployed. Here,  now,  we  have  the  means  of  representing 
twelve  consonant  sounds;  but  since  in  writing  we  can  make 
either  light  or  heavy  marks,  this  number  may  be  doubled  by 
recognizing  the  same  number  of  heavi/  straight  lines  and 
curves. 

While  it  is  found  necessary  to  make  each  of  the  primitive 
characters  heavy,  in  order  to  obtain  b.  sufficient  number,  it  is 
also  found  a  useful  and  philosophical  method  of  distinguish- 
ing between  the  natures  of  different  sounds.  Thus,  eight  of 
the  sounds  which  these  characters  are  to  represent  are  mere 
whlipers,  produced  by  the  transition  of  the  organs  of  speech, 
from  one  position  to  another,  or  by  the  simple  contact  of  dif- 
ferent parts  of  the  mouth,  without  any  vocal  sound;  and 
there  are  eight  others  made  in  the  same  manner,  but  they 
have  in  addition  a  slightly  roughened  or  vocal  sound,  which 
require  a  greater  effort  to  produce  Ihem. 

To  follow  nature,  therefore,  and  preserve  a  correspondenoe 
between  signs  and  sounds,  the  light  signs  are  made  to  repre- 
sent the  light  or  whispered  sounds,  and  the  heavy  signs  to  re- 
present the  heavy  sounds.  Thus,  both  the  difference  between 
the  sounds  and  their  resemblance  are  at  once    represented. 


»  < 


i 


20 


INTHODUCTIOM   TO  TIIK 


And  it  being  nu  naturui  to  reprosent  a  liglit  Hound  by  a  light 
stroke,  and  a  heavy  aound  by  a  heavy  Htrulco,  thu  phono- 
graphic pupil  fiiida,  after  a  little  practice,  that  he  inukoo  tiie 
difference  in  the  strokes  without  any  tlioui,'lit  about  it.  But 
the  Hiuiilarity  of  sound  between  tlie  heavy  and  light  strokes 
is  80  great  that,  if  at  any  time  the  dift'erenco  in  the  thickness 
of  the  lines  is  not  clearly  made,  it  will  not  seriously  affect 
the  legibility  of  the  writing  to  the  experienced  phonogra- 
pher.  Thus,  for  example,  if  the  word  Sinunuti  were  written 
so  as  to  be  pronounced  Ziiutiitadi,  the  reader  could  hardly 
mistake  the  intention  of  the  writer. 

The  Consonants  are  classified  as  follows:— 
1.  Adrufts. — These  elements,  sometimes  called  explo- 
dents,  are  produced  by  a  total  contact  of  the  organs  of 
apeech,  abruptly  interrupting  and  exploding  the  outward 
passage  of  the  breath,  or  the  voice.  They  are  eight  in 
number,  and  being  stiff,  unyielding  sounds,  are  appropriately 
represented  by  the  eight  straight,  unyielding  right  lines,  as 
illustrated  in  the  following  table, — the  italicized  letters  of 
the  words  indicating  the  sounds  represented  : 

Whupered,      \  rope,           |  fa<e,      /  etch,            locft. 
Spoken,  \  robe,  |  fa/ie,     /  edge,     ley. 

By  a  little  observation  in  comparing  the  sound  of  p  with 
that  of  b,  in  the  words  mpe  and  robe,  the  distinction  of  whiS' 
pered  and  spoken,  or  light  and  heavy,  will  be  appreciated.  As 
far  as  articulation,  or  the  contact  of  the  organs  of  speech  is 
concerned,  the  consonants  j>  and  i  are  identical;  the  sound 
of  the  former,  however,  is  produced  by  the  breath  only, 
while  the  latter  requires  the  assistr.nce  of  the  voice,  which 
commences  before  the  lips,  the  organs  by  which  the  articula- 
tion is  produced,  are  disconnected.  The  same  remarks  apply 
to  each  of  the  other  pairs  of  abrupts,  as  the  reader  will  dis- 
cover by  speaking  the  illustrative  words  in  connection. 


»»*»»w»^"r»**w*w^ 


liwwiltfiinliii^^iifflBi 


•Mim 


*«i*di*<k**MMi**' 


riiB 


li^ht  Hound  by  a  light 
>-y  Htroko,  tho  phono- 
ce,  that  ho  inakom  tlie 
lioui^'ht  about  it.  Dut 
aavy  and  li^ht  Htrokoit 
irunco  in  tho  thicknOHH 
ill  not  seriously  affect 
'xperionced  phonogru- 
Stnsinati  were  written 
J  reader  could   hardly 

Hows: — 

netiines  called  explo- 
ict  of  the  urgatiH  of 
iploding  the  outward 
They  are  eight  in 
inds,  are  appropriately 
ioldin<T  right  lines,  aa 
e  italicized  letters  of 
3nted  : 

■^  etcA,     locA. 

^  edge,     log. 

the  sound  of  p  with 
le  distinction  of  whis- 
II  be  appreciated,  Aa 
e  organs  of  speech  is 
I  identical;  the  sound 

by  the  breath  only, 
a  of  the  voice,  which 
by  which  the  articula- 
te same  remarks  apply 
B  the  reader  will  dia- 
H  in  connection. 


^******iMbMi^ 


li*4akA***4 


I  «  I  f  ***^A*< 


MANU\L   Oil'   PlIONOaRAPIiy. 


21 


2.  CoMTisuANTs : — The  organs  of  speech  are  in  contact 
in  the  production  of  these  elements,  yet  not  so  firmly  as 
to  totally  obstruct  the  passage  of  breath,  or  voice;  but  the 
soundo  may  be  continued  any  length  of  time.  There  are, 
also,  eight  of  these  elements— half  of  them  whispered  and 
half  spoken;  and  as  they  are  of  a  flowing,  yielding  nature, 
they  are  appropriately  represented  by  curved  and  flowing 
signs;  thus: 


Whispered, 

V^sfl/e, 

(  wrea^A, 

)  bu«*. 

^  vicious. 

^oken. 

V^  save, 

(   wreathe. 

)  buj». 

^  vifi'on. 

3.  Liquids: — These  are  r  and  I,  and  are  called  liquids  be- 
cause they  readily  run  into  or  unite  with  other  consonant 
sounds.  They  are  not  distinguished  by  any  variation  of 
sound,  as  the  abrupts  and  continuants,  and  are  represented  by 
light  curves;  thus: 

^  mi,        for.  ■>> 

4.  Nasals: — The  sounds  of  m,  n  and  ng,  are  called  nasals 
from  the  fact  that  the  organs  are  brought  in  complete  contact, 
and  the  voice  driven  through  the  nose.  The  m  and  n  are 
represented  by  the  two  remaining  light  curves,  mnd  ng  by  tho 
heavy  curve  corresponding  to  n,  as  being  nearly  related  to 
that  sound;  thus: 


seem. 


'seen, 


ning 


5.  CoALKScBNTs: — F  and  «;  hold  a  medial  character  be- 
tween the  vowels  and  consonants;  w  being  a  weak  sound  or 
modification  of  <W  (w),  and  y  a  modification  of  e  (*«)•  They 
never  occur  in  English  except  before  a  vowel,  with  which 
they  closely  coalesce.  The  following  are  their  phonographic 
signs,  and  the  words  illustrating  their  powers. 

>^  way,  ^  yea. 


i^^^^^^> »»■»»■■»»«>■  1 1  p.p»u>»>>»»t>»»~»>tn»»i»»»»m 


^ 


^■"^mSSmmmik 


riiiiiiiiiMi 


n 


22 


INTHCHdUTION   TO   TUB 


0.  Ahpiratr  :— The  power  of  h  is  iimply  a  brealhinsf  up- 
on the  following  vnwfll,  and  Im  jfonorully  ri'preiionted  by  a 
light  dot  placed  bt'foro  the  vowel;  but  a  coiiBonant'i  form 
it  aomotitnea  needed,  which  ii  written  thus:  </  h. 

Vowel  ABKAiKirMENT:* — In  order  to  rcpreaont  twelve 
vowel  sounda  by  thf  two  aiffnii,  a  dot  and  a  da«h,  a  achcme 
■imilar  to  that  of  repreaontlng  musical  sounds  by  the  round 
note  i«  retorted  to.  As  the  vowels  rarely  occur  except  in 
connection  with  a  consonant,  thoy  are  indicated  by  the  posi- 
tion in  which  the  dot  or  danh  is  placed  to  the  conMonant 
stroke;  thut,  a  dot  placed  at  the  beginninjj  of  a  consonant 
represents  the  vowel  i"  (ee,)  at  the  middle,  a  (nge  )  at  tli«» 
end,  q  (ah;)  the  dash  at  the  bofjrinninjj  is  O  (awe,)  at  the  mid- 
dle, o  (owe,)  at  the  end,  <n  (oo.)  The  remaining  six  vowels 
are  thortor  brief,  at  compared  with  the  fore«oinf;  nix,  and  are 
appropriately  represented  by  the  dot  and  daHli  in  the  same 
manner,  but  made  liyhfer;  and  all  that  has  been  said  inregord 
to  light  and  heavy  consonants  applies  to  the  vowels.  In  the 
following  illustration  the  vowel  signs  are  placed  to  a  dotted 
line  merely  to  indicate  the  position  of  the  dot  and  dash;  it  it 
no  part  of  the  vowel.  The  italic  letters  in  the  accompany- 
ing worda  sujrijost  the  vowel  sounds: 


'I  «eli 


•!  ale, 


I  arm, 


all, 

I 
!  on, 


-\  oak, 
Up, 


!  ooze, 
wood. 


■jtll,  •;  I'll,  jam,  !>...,  I  ~r>  i 

DiPiiTHONOs: — These  being  compound  sounds,  and  all  the 
simple  characters  being  otherwise  disposed  of,  they  are  rep- 

*  For  the  greater  nimpliflontion  of  Phonography,  there  is,  ordinarily, 
no  (lintinction  mnde  between  the  aound  of  e  in  morcy  ami  that  of  «  in 
in«rry;  betwaon  a  in  dare,  and  a  in  dote;  nor  between  a  in  fo*t  and  a  in 
far.  The  signs  fur  representing  ineso  three  sounds  (?,  n,  and  a,)  together 
with  variims  foreign  sounds,  are  provided  on  pnge  127,  which  may  be 
adopted  by  the  proficient  phonographer,  if  ho  wishes  to  be  very  uoourate 
in  the  representation  of  spoken  words. 


4<i^^^^^<P^ 


»  s  >  »| ii  I  ■>^»^<w^^^^wwr»-'<^ 


for 


en 


iMiiii 


•---''"-■  — *-'"^-  ■*^^*-^ 


TIIR 


limply  a  brcathinif  up- 
rully  ri'preiipnted  by  a 
lut  a  coiiiunant'a  form 
thus:  /  h. 

r  to  rcproKont  twelve 
and  a  daah,  a  Bchi>me 
il  Hoiindi  by  the  round 
rarely  occur  except  in 
u  indicatt'd  by  the  posi- 
icod  to  the  conMonant 
[rinniii)r  of  a  conBonant 
niddle,  H  (age  )  at  th" 
;  18  O  (awe,)  at  the  mid- 

0  remaining  six  vowoU 
e  forej(olnf;  kIx,  and  are 

and  duHh  in  the  same 
has  been  said  in  regard 
to  the  vowola.     In  the 

1  are  placed  to  a  dotlt'd 
the  (lot  and  dash;  it  is 

tors  in  the  accompany- 


-J  oak,      _!  ooze, 

-j  Mp,         j  wood, 

iind  sounds,  and  all  the 
sposed  of,  they  are  rep- 

;raphy,  thero  is,  ordinarily, 
in  iD^rcy  and  that  of  «  in 
'  between  a  in  Sail  and  a  in 
ounda  (f,  i^,  and  a,)  together 
on  pane  127,  which  may  be 
n  wiaho3  to  be  very  accurate 


'" rrii 


MA.MAI,    UK    l>(ION(t(iRAPIir. 


23 


resontod   by  roinpl.-jt  slgna.       They  will   bo  unflerstood   by 
the  following  illustration: 


V  ! 


tsle, 


ot'l, 


I  owl, 


r.ew. 


TRiriiTin)i«(jH:~These  rpsult  from  the  union  of  w  with 
eoch  of  t''(>  nl.ovc  dipiith.-ngn,  wiiich  uro  morn  convenient  to 
repreeont  by  single  charactt-rs  tliuii  otherwise;  thus: 


'  ii'ino. 


i  quoit, 


I 

rj  wound. 


ORUANIC  CLAHSIFK'ATION  OF  CONHONANTS. 


Abrupts. 


Contin- 
uants. 


\  Wliispei'fil, 

Whimpered, 
Spoken, 


\b 


Jjiquula, 

Resonants, 

Ambigues, 


ii 

E  q 

It 

(th) 
[tk  ) 

n 


/-eh 
Vzh 


a 


/  h 


In  the  above  division  of  the  consonant  sounds,  reading  in 
columns  downwards,  we  begin  with,  (1)  those  formed  at  the 
lips,  as/j,  6,/,  &c.,  and  call  thi'm  Lnbinls;  (2)  we  then  go 
back  to  the  region  of  the  tip  of  the  tongue  and  the  teeth, 
where  t,  d,  &c.,  are  formed,  which  class  wc  term  Lingm-Dm- 
tals,  (tongue-teeth  sounds;)  (■".)  then  to  tho  hard  polato  or 
roof  of  the  mouth,  a  little  buck  of  tho  teeth,  where  we  find 
chjysh,  &c.,  which  we  call  T/ingiio- Palalah;  and,  finally,  to 
the  root  of  the  tongue,  near  tiie  throat,  where  Jc,  g,  die,  ore 
formed,  which  wo  term  Outturals,  or  Thrmt- Somnla. 

A  practical  arrangement  of  li.e  whole  alphabet,  for  refer- 
ence in  study,  etc.,  will  be  found  on  the  next  page. 


•^"•^wFi^^^^i^^ 


'"'•"*''*»WI^*'W**'»W*W*iW»»» 


:.'Sf,t*tffSit!9imiimf0ii*!m 


^nm 


I  I  I  f  -  •  -  •-»*^^l^*** 


ll^labtt. 


FS. 

*e 

ue 

e&th 

eathc 

[SS 

izz 

cioiis 
sion 
i. 
1 

11 

m 

dd 

sp 

'»11 


m  seem 

n  seen 

<  i 

»   C    >  w  tcay 

^  l^  h.  7;and 


CO 

O 
Z 
O 

K 

a 
ft 


V! 


Ai 


i    isle 
&    oil 

V    otol 

H    dwpo  ^ 


bular  view  of  the  phonetic 
jity  of  the  characters  em- 
5  longhand  letters  of  the 
this  form  for  occasional 
appreciate  the  beauty  and 
r  course  of  lessons  must 


»■ »>>i»it»» 


\ 


mml  0f  ||0n0grap^g. 


ttBBtin  I, 

THE  CONSONANTS  AND  LONG  VOWELS. 

If  the  student  who  is  desirous  of  acquiring  the  phono- 
graphic art  has  attentively  read  the  preceding  introduc- 
tion, and  obtamed  a  clear  idea  of  the  phonetic  principle 
so':     K  \  r.f'*''"'*^  '"  mastering  the  course  of  L-' 

ractice;  """"  .  "^""^^^  ''''^  ^^^^^  ^^  P^^ient 

piact  ce  for  a  tew  weeks,  will  accomplish  the  object 

Let  every  paragraph  be  carefully  read  and  compared 

with  the  accompanying  illustrations,  and  every  shorthand 

ZTT  r7T  ''P"''  Pr— <'-g  at  the  same 

time  the  sound  of  the  letter  or  word  aloud. 

ruHnt  .r^r  "^"""^^  ^'  "'*^'  '"^"  P»P«^  ''''^  a  double 
ruhng,  the  Imes  just  wide. enough  apart  to  admit  the 
proper  length  of  the  consonants  between  them,  is  a  greal 
advantage,  at  first,  in  enabling  the  learner  to  make  his 
consonants  of  a  uniform  length. 

Until  the  pupil  becomes  familiar  with  the  ^igns    a 
pencil  should  be  employed  in  preference  to  a  pen,'  fle^ 

be  held"  r  T  "  ^^°^''  "^y  ^-^  «Bed;-it   hould 

tththeiT^''"""  ''"'  *'""^  ''^^  second  finger, 
witn  the  first  resting  on  top,  as  in  drawing  or  ordinar^ 

writing;  or  between  the   first  and  second  fingersTeep 
>ngit  in  place  by  a  slight  pressure  of  the  tLmb      "^ 


MHHMM 


. - -  -^^^A^iX  «  «  «  «  «  >A^^*<i***<>*i*** 


26 


MANUAL   OF    PHONOGRAPHY. 


"1 


U! 


A  good  style  of  writing  can  only  be  obtained  by  en- 
deavoring, in  tbe  commencement,  to  form  the  characters 
with  mathematical  precision.  After  a  little  experience 
in  tracing  (he  forms  accurately,  the  learner  will  find  no 
difficulty  in  executing  them  rapidly;  the  attempt  to  write 
swiftly  at  first,  on  the  other  hand,  will  not  only  delay  the 
attainment,  but  lead  to  ungraceful  and  illegible  writing. 

Let  the  pupil  now  take  his  pen  or  pencil,  and  go 
through  the  list  of  consonants,  writing  them  as  on  the 
following  page,  speaking  at  the  same  time  the  power  of 
each  letter;  and  carefully  observing  the  light  and  heavy 
character  of  the  signs,  and  their  proper  length. 

1.  Commence  the  strokes  so  that  when  of  the  proper 
length  they  will  rest  on  the  line  of  writing.  The  con- 
sonants should  be  written  about  the  size  of  those  given 
in  these  pages;  and  particular  attention  should,  at  first, 
be  observed  in  writing  the  curved  thick  letters,  making 
them  thick  in  the  middle  only,  and  tapering  to  a  light 
line  toward  each  extremity. 

2.  The  perpendicular  and  inclined  consonants  are 
written  from  the  top  downward,  as  \p,  \t,  ~^r;  the 
horizontal  ones  are  written  from  left  to  right;  as k, 

3.  The  letter  f^  I,  when  the  only  consonant  in  a 
word,  is  always  written  upward;  at  other  times  it  may 
be  written  either  upward  or  downward,  as  is  most  con- 
venient. 

4.  The  _y  sh  is  always  written  downward  when  the 
only  consonant  in  a  word,  and  either  downward  or  tip- 
ward  at  other  times. 

5.  The  aspirate  ^  A  is  written  upward  under  all 
cl-cumstances. 


'SK^ 


T, 

G, 
K, 

F, 

B., 

s,  : 
s, 

L 

R 
M 

X 

w 
w 

Y 
H 


— — "T 

lAPIIY. 

be  obtained  by  en- 
I  form  the  characters 
ir  a  little  experience 

learner  will  find  no 

the  attempt  to  write 
ill  not  only  delay  the 
ind  illegible  writing. 
I  or  pencil,  and  go 
ting  them  as  on  the 
ne  time  the  power  of 

the  light  and  heavy 
)per  length, 
t  when  of  the  proper 
'  writing.  The  con- 
e  size  of  those  given 
ition  should,  at  first, 
thick  letters,  making 
1  tapering  to  a  light 

ined  consonants  are 

(ft  to  right;  as k, 

only  consonant  in  a 
t  other  times  it  may 
ard,  as  is  most  con- 
downward  when  the 
her  downward  or  up- 

en  upward  under  all 


wwww^'^wwv'wwwvf^^vy  '■^■• 


"  "  '  •  I  I  I  I 


ON   WKITINO   TUK   CONSONANTS. 


EXKRCISE  0\  THE  CONSONANTS. 

P,B  \\  \\  \\  \\  \\  v^\  v^\ 

T'«   11    II    il    II    II    II   11 
G,  J  //  yy     //     //     yy    yy    ^y 
K,  G 

F.  V  ^V    VV   VV    V,^   V.^    ^^   ^^ 
^•^    ((     ((     ((     ((     ((     ((    (( 

S.Z   ))   ))   ))   ))   ))   ))   )) 

S.  X  J  J      jy      jy      jy      yy     ^^,     ^^ 

R  "^  "^  ^  ■^ 

xM  .-^  ,->.  ^^  _. 


^  ^  ^  ^  ^  ^ 


H 


f 


AA^AA<yK>^>i****i " 


MANUAL    OF    PIIONOGRAIMIY. 


COMBINATIONS  OF  CONSONANTS. 

6.  In  commencing  to  write  a  word,  the  first  thing 
the  learner  has  to  do  is  to  pronounce  it  slowly,  and 
ascertain  what  arc  the  elementary  sounds  of  which  it  is 
composed,  and  then  write  the  consonant  signs,  as  here- 
tofore directed,  without  lifting  the  pen  till  all  are  written, 

7.  When  the  first  consonant  to  be  written  requires  a 
downward  stroke,  it  is  commenced  its  length  above  the 
line  of  writing  and  struck  to  the  line,  and  if  a  downward 
stroke  follows,  it  is  carried  on  below  the  line;  thus,  •^— 
pd,  •• -U.  f/p;  if  the  first  consonant  is  a  horizontal  stroke, 
and  a  down-stroke  follows,  it  is  written  above  the^line 
and  the  second  one  carried  to  it;  thus,  ]  kd,  /  nch; 
but  if  an  up-stroke  sign  follows  the  horizontal,  the  latter 
should  be  written  on  the  line;    thus,  ^_/^/h?,  __^kl. 

8.  When  a  straight  consonant  follows  another  of  the 
same  kind,  the  two  are  written  by  a  stroke  double  the 
usual  length;  as  Wt,     \^i>p. 

9.  In  reading  the  consonants  in  a  word,  they  must 
of  course  be  uttered  in  the  order  in  which  they  were 
written;  thus,  for  example,  in  reading  /^  the  must 
be  read  first,  because  it  is  evident  it  was  written  first,  as 
the  writer  could  not  have  begun  at  the  angle  and  written 
the  /^  and  then  gone  back  and  written  the  ,  without 
violating  the  rule  requiring  the  skeleton  of  a  word  to 
be  written  before  lifting  the  pen;  and  he  could  not  have 
begun  at  the  bottom  of  the  / ,  and  written  it  upwards 
and  then  the  ^^  backwards,  without  violating  the  two 
rules,  that  ch  is  to  be  written  downwards  and  n  from 
left  to  right. 

It  sometimes  happens  that  a  consonant  which  seems 
to  be  farther  along  than  another  in  the  line  of  writing. 


,^^„,„„l,„ip,,^VW^IWi[Vqi^p«<p^^X«IF^^^W«^V^W^^^I^  •«>•>*« 


in 
al 
to 
ki 
th 

th 
po 
or 
th 
lei 
be 
be 


\ 

\ 
\ 

\ 

L 
\ 


'HiOWMI 


'K^m^am 


ii»' 


Al'lIY. 


)NANTS. 


■ord,  the  first  thing 
unce  it  slowly,  and 
)und8  of  which  it  is 
nant  signs,  as  herc- 
n  till  all  are  written, 
e  written  requires  a 
ts  length  above  the 
!,  and  if  a  downward 
the  line;  thus,  •■^— 
a  horizontal  stroke, 
itten  above  the  line 
thus,  ]kd,  /nch; 
lorizontal,  the  latter 
,^_^/H?,  __/'^~  kl. 
Hows  another  of  the 
a  stroke  double  the 

1  a  word,  they  must 
in  which  they  were 
ig  /^  the  must 
was  written  first,  as 
he  angle  and  written 
tten  the  ',  without 
:eleton  of  a  word  to 
id  he  could  not  have 
id  written  it  upwards 
ut  violating  the  two 
vnwards  and  n  from 

1  son  ant  which  seems 
the  line  of  writing. 


CONSONANT  C0JIB1NATI0N8. 


>«« m 

29 


must  be  read  first;  as^;  but  from  the  fact  that  /  is 
always  to  be  written  downward,  we  know  the  letters  are 
to  be  ready;  and  not  fj.  By  a  little  observation  of  this 
kind  the  learner  will  soon  see  at  a  glance,  and  without 
thought,  how  any  word  is  to  be  read. 

The  exercise  which  follows  should  first  be  read,  tracing 
the  characters  with  a  pointer;  in  doing  which  either  the 
powers  of  the  letters  may  be  used,  as  t  k,  k  t,  p  k  &c 
or  the  names,  te  ka,  ka  te,  pe  ka,  &c.;  in  class  teaching 
the  latter  method  is  the  best,  after  having  drilled  the 
learners  well  in  speaking  the  simple  powers  of  the  alpha- 
bet. After  reading  the  exercise  in  this  way,  it  should 
be  neatly  copied  with  pen  or  pencil,  and  again  read. 


EXERCISE  ON  CONSONANT  COMBINATIONS. 


n  z  -7 


L  n 


"^'^  '^\  ^-^  r\ -f  r—.~y- 
\V7  \_^ur 


»»**^w*^ 


npv^n^^p** 


'*'********w*««*«w«wwv«v 


^''^^^^^'^^'^^'^^iivm^mw^mmm 


uism-^' 


■ 


;i 


i\ 


as  in 


10.  The  above  table  illustrates  the  manner  of  writing 
the  six  long  vowels.  The  dotted  line  represents  the 
length  of  any  consonant,  to  which  the  vowel  sign,  (the 
dot  or  dash,)  may  be  written  in  cither  of  three  places, 
the  beginning,  middle  or  end. 

11.  The  heavy  dot  at  the  first  place,  or  beginning  of 
any  consonant,  is  always  G;  at  the  second  place,  or  mid- 
dle, a,-  at  the  third  place,  or  end,  q.  The  heavy  dash 
at  the  first  place  is  0;  at  the  second  place  O;  at  the 
third  place  <D. 

12.  The  proper  sounds  of  these  dots  and  dashes,  in 
their  several  positions,  should  be  well  memorized.  They 
may  be  designated  thus: —  e  is  the  first  place  heavy  dot; 
a  is  the  second  place  heavy  dot;  (I  is  the  third  place 
heavy  dot;  9  is  first  place  heavy  dash;  o  is  the  second 
place  heavy  dash;  0)  is  the  third  place  heavy  dash. 

13.  In  vocalizing  the  consonants,  that  is,  in  placing 
the  vowels  to  them,  they  should  be  written  near  the 
strokes,  bnt  not  so  that  they  will  join ;  thus,  V^  eve., 
X  pf^y^  '"^  may;  the  dashes  should  be  written  at  right 
angles  with  the  consonants;  as,  \  paw,  ^  show,  |_  too. 

14.  If  we  wish  the  vowel  to  be  read  first,  we  place 
it  before  or  above  the  consonant;  thus,  j  eat,  V^  ape, 
y^  aim,  ji_  oak;  if  we  wish  it  to  be  read  after  the 
consonant,  we  write  it  after  or  below  the  stroke;  thus, 

N^  how,    /f  hay,  ^  ghoe. 

15.  The  rule  for  placing  and  reading  the  vowels  is, 
that  the  first  place  is  at  the  end  where  the  pen  began 
writing  the  consonant;  thus,  see  the  L-line  in  the  foUow- 


R 


\PIIY. 


?, 


-io 
oak, 


ooze. 


e  manner  of  writing 
line  represents  the 
ho  vowel  sign,  (the 
ler  of  three  places, 

ice,  or  beginning  of 

econd  place,  or  mid- 

The  heavy  dash 

nd  place  Oj    at  the 

dots  and  dashes,  in 
1  memorized.  They 
irst  place  heavy  dot; 
(I  is  the  third  place 
sh;  o  is  the  second 
ce  heavy  dash. 
,  that  is,  in  placing 
90  written  near  the 
join ;  thus,  V^  eve., 
1  be  written  at  right 
aw,  y\  show,  |_  too. 
read  first,  we  place 
thus,  j  eat,  \^  ape, 
I  be  read  after  the 
w  the  stroke;  thus, 

eading  the  vowels  is, 
here  the  pen  began 
L-line  in  the  foUow- 


»***— *******^M^^fc^^< 


EXERCISE    ON    THE    LONG    VOWELS. 


31 


ing  exercise,  where  /^  being  written  upward,  e  and  9 
are  placed  at  the  lower  end,  and  q  and  (O  at  the  top; 
<r     must  be  vocalized  in  the  same  manner. 

The  following  exercise  should  be  read  over  frequently, 
till  the  learner  acquires  the  correct  sounds  of  the  vowels 
and  their  eonsecutive  order.  He  will,  at  the  same  time, 
become  familiar  with  many  of  the  consonants.  The 
sounds  of  the  vowels  are  indicated  by  key-letters  at 
the  top  of  each  column;  and  each  line  is  preceded  by 
the  type  letter  of  the  consonant  employed  in  the  line. 

EXERCISE    ON    THE    LONG    VOWELS. 

T0WKL8    rOLLOWINO    CX>N80NA.ST«. 

8  a  Gl         e  o 


(D 


63 

L  r 


K      . 


!   R 


'N 


I-  I.     r  I- 

/•  ^    y-  yi 

r  r  <'  /< 

'-r^  —V  ..--^  ,-r, 

TOWSLS  rBKOIDINO  OOiraOWAIfTS. 

H  .1  1  -I 

~^  ^  'A  ^ 


x« 


^*^*''*^M^^*^Mi«<v^*<Mn»W«««« 


"^^■W*^P««V««W«W««W«««iV«M 


f;    ■ 


lMlii<iA<liAA<iJiAA^iAifcA^iAA«tii^^a^AAA^^^^i<i<^^Ji^^awlM^^^^l^rtMM^^^^>^<V 


32 


MANUAL   OF    PHONOGRAPH y. 


READING     LESSON,    WITH    A    KEY. 
In  the  following  exercise   the  learner   has   a  key  to 
assist  him  in  decyphering  the  phonographic  construction 
of  words.      It  should  be    well   studied,  preparatory   to 
reading  and  writing  the  exercises  which  follow. 


[' 


te 


te 


h     to 


L 


ta> 


I        et         'I         at  I       et  -|         ot 

L — .      tem       L-— ,      tim        L       tak        I tek 

I      kat  I      kot  \  kep  /v,    kap 


kel 


mek 


kol 


■  raak 


mel 


niol 


-^-^  kam      — ■■ — '  kqm 
N'      pel         ^N/'pal  X/'^  pol        \/^   pffil 


~V~. 


rem 


rom 


^. 


qrm 


U 


I       tcom 


After  the  exercise  has  been  read  once  or  twice,  it  is 
a  good  plan  to  lay  a  strip  of  paper  over  the  key,  and 
read  without  the  aid  -of  the  printed  words.  Then  re- 
verse the  process:  laying  the  strip  of  paper  over  the 
phonographic  words,  and  write  them  from  memory  of 
i    their  form,  or  knowledge  of  their  construction. 


iA**A«>lMkA*AdaMk**A****i^ 


;APIIV. 


A    KEY. 

arner  has  a  key  to 
graphic  construction 
lied,  preparatory  to 
rhich  follow. 

-I        ok 

ik        L_        tek 
ep  X   kffip 


el 


rool 


am ^-'  kqm 


d1  \/      pottl 


rm 


U- 


I       ta>m 


once  or  twice,  it  is 
r  over  the  key,  and 
1  words.  Then  re- 
)  of  paper  over  the 
jm  from  memory  of 
instruction. 


mww^^wwv^i^w^^p^v 


I  I  m  ii>^^^^^^^^ 


k***Mk*********ik****^ 


ON     VOCALIZING. 


33 


In  reading  the  following  exercise  the  learner  must  re- 
ly on  his  own  knowledge.  If  he  fails  in  remembering 
the  consonants,  he  will  have  to  turn  back  to  page  27  to 
refresh  his  memory;  and  if  the  sounds  of  the  vowels  are 
forgotten,  page  30  will  assist  him. 


Reading  Exercise  I. 


IV  •)  ^-./^-AK 


T  JfT 


1  *r  \  /'  /^    ^  c  )-  J- 


\ 


0    L   I ^  X 

I    ^ 


11-  k  \--.\r  \r 

'^'V  /^  /^  /TV.  -^ 
^      ^'      1     ^     / 


>      ^ 


ON    VOCALIZINa. 
16.     In  vocalizing  the  consona.-t  of  a  word,   the  first 
thing  to  be   done  is    to  ascertain  whether  the   vowel 
to  be  written  is  a  dot  sign  or  a  dash  sign;  and,  secondly, 
what  place  to  the  consonant  it  should  occupy. 


^'"••"^•■^^^^'^^•^•••VVWW^fW*^^ 


"■I  l»n»,p»| 


II  Ml  mm 


•  %        »»,Vi»  ■"'■atitviif^riiS^'- 


34 


MANTAI.   or    IMIONOdKAI'lIY. 


17.  If  the  learner'H  nioniory  is  not  Kood,  ur  his  percep- 
tion quick,  80  thut  he  cnn  decide  these  points  reudily,  a 
good  plan  for  arriving  at  the  result  is  to  counneueo  at 
the  beginning  of  the  scale  of  vowels  and  speak  thorn  thus: 
e,  a,  q,  (observing  that  thus  far  the  signs  are  heavy  dots, 
and  that  the  remaindjr  are  dashes,)  O,  Q,  (0,  till  he 
arrives  at  the  one  he  wishes  to  write;  just  as  the  learner 
of  music,  when  he  cannot  strike  the  proper  sound  of  a 
note,  commences  at  ilo  and  runs  up  the  scale  till  he 
obtains  the  proper  sound. 

16.     Words  containing  only  horizontal  consorants,  if 

the  accented  vowels  are  first  place,  are  written  about  the 

height  of   a  vertical  stroke  above  the  line;  a.i    *       me, 

kry;   if  the  vowels  are  second  or  third  place,  they 

are  written  on  the  line;  as,  — —  gay,  ^^  mow. 

NoTB.— For  the  purpoae  of  uniatins  the  lonmer  until  he  bocomei  f» 
miliiir  with  phonetio  printing,  a  few  of  the  tint  ezcrciios  for  writing  will 


be  printed  in  both  inodaii  of  spelling. 


Writing  Exercise  I. 

First  place  Dot,  nfler  the  con^nnnt. — 
Pea,   tea,    key,  fee,  see,  she,  '>je,  lue,  knee. 
Pe,      te,      ke,      fe,     hb,    Je,      le,    mz,    ne. 
Before  the  contonant. — Ent,  each,  eke,  eve,  ease,  eel,  car. 
Ct,     e(j,      ek,     ev,    ez,    el,    er. 

Second  place  Dot,  after  the  coiinoHant. — 
Pay,  day,  gay,  they,  say,  may,  way,  hay. 
Pa,      da,     ga,      da,       sa,      ma,     wa,     ha. 
Before. — Ape,  eight,  aid,   age,  ache,  ale,  air,  aim. 
Qp,    at,       ad,     aj,      ak,       al,    i^r,    am. 

Third  place  Dot,  after  the  coiuonant. — Pa,  ma. 

Pci,  mci. 

Before. — Are. 


¥ 


Si 


Ti 


I 

■tn 
hor 
exc 
di>n 
the 
con 
Wh 

^■s 

thir 
Thn 
(14, 
whi 
Inol 
the 
first 
that 


»l 


.'>**' 


***********< 


VI'HY. 


good,  ur  his  percep- 
se  pointH  rcudily,  a 
is  to  coiumuueo  at 
rid  speak  them  thus: 
ligns  are  heavy  dote, 
,)  e,  O,  (0,  till  he 
;  juHt  as  the  learner 
proper  sound  of  a 
p  the  scale  till  he 

ontal  consot  ants,  if 
ro  written  o^out  the 
lie  line;  an  *  nifi, 
ir  third  plaoe,  they 
,  ^^  mow. 

ver  until  he  booomei  tm 
i  ezcrclsos  for  writing  will 


nt. — 

me,  knee. 

m%    ne. 

e,  eve,  ease,  eel,  ear. 
E,     ev,    ez,    el,    er. 

It. — 

ay,  hay. 

va,     ha. 

le,  ale,  air,  aim. 

,       al,    i^r,    am. 

ant. — Pa,  ma. 
Pcu  mci. 


>*«^w«««w« 


>***'  "III  I  ij^    I I II I  I  I 


),^^;****4a^ki^^MtaM 


RKVIEW     OF    THE     »'1R8T    LEHHON. 


35 


First  place  Dabii,  after  the  ammnant  — 

J'aw,  jaw,  thaw,  saw,  law,  gnaw. 
P«,      jo,      to,        BO,      lo,      ne. 
Be/ore.— Owfrht,  awed,  awl,  awn. 
Ot,  od,       ol,       on. 

Second   place    dash,    after    the  coimnant.—Bov,   toe. 

Bo,      to, 
dough,  foe,  though,  sow,  show,  low,  know,  woe,  hoe. 
do,         fo,     do,  so,      /o,        lo,    no,       wo     ho. 

Bifore.—{)dQ,  oak,  oath,  owes,  oar,  own. 
CM,    ok,     ot,       oz,       or,     on. 

Third  place  Dash,  after  the  comonant.—Qoo,  shoo.— 

Kd),     J(B. 

Before, — Ooze. 
(Ds. 

.fnlkV.  wT(  Wh'"^.'""  "'"  ''"""'*  ^  '*''*"  '"  "'IHnKtho  heavy  curved 
•trokesf  (2.)  What  consonants  are  written  ilowowards?  How  are  the 
horuontal  one.  written?  What  are  thev?  (3.  4,  .n<l  6.)  What  are  the 
Mceptions  t,.  these  gonermi  rules?  (8.5  What  is  the  first  thine  to  b« 
done  in  writing  a  word  phonographically  ?  What  next?  (7.)  tfow  are 
the  oonaonanU  adjusted  to  the  lino  of  writing?    (8.  i  When  one  strainht 

wr'."?°.J"""]"  ''^•"•""  °f  "'"  """''  '«'"'••  •"•"  "fe  they  written  ?  (».) 
nnat  IS  the  order  of  nwdino  (ha../.niu.i..>„tu  i_  . j  «    ,t.\  ^  ■•         ^     ' 


wi...  iT.u J — .~v..„,  „,  „,„  „,,„„  H,,,„,  „„^  „rg  ,„gy  written  T    (». ) 

W  hat  is  the  order  of  reading  the  consonants  in  a  word  ?    ( 10. )  How  manv 

I>iaeoS  have  nnnmniinf.    »«   _t.!..l.   i.   u_    _  ...     *•-/...  .-V 


—      —  •■'—•"ii  ^■■nuuuaunniiM  in  a  wora  I    (  lu.  I  now  manv 

peaces  have  consonants,  to  which  vowels  m*y  be  written?  (11  and  12.) 
iii^\  ^S'w^^"'^  **'  "1"/'"'  r'"""  •"""■'  ''"'T  The  SMond?  The 
Th„  ,hJ»  ^I'5  '•'""'""''  "']••»  fi™'  Pl'X"'  hoavy  dash?  The  second  7 
1  ho  third  ?    ( U. )  How  should  the  vowels  bo  written  to  the  consonanU  ? 

1^  ?  J  »  'iLi^' P*rP?"'*,'«'""'  '"•"kes  is  it  written  ?  Which  side  of  the 
oolined?    Which  of  the  horitontal  ?    (15.;  At  which  end  of  i  and  A  is 

n™i  IhinlTjr."'  "•"'^SM,!'')  J"  ^-"""'"'g  »  word,  what  is  the 
Jitst  thing  to  be  determined  ?    What  the  second  ?    (18.)  How  are  wonU 

that  ouotaio  only  s  horiiootal  stroke  written  ? 


-^——^ MM.;.: 


^•*w^»ww« 


■Mtfiiriiin  ii  nni1-  rl  r-iii  in  mi, 


m 


n 


!l 


^^ftMM**<A*tt**«**t 


ItBson  2. 


SHORT    VOWELS -DIPHTHONOS- DOT    11 -VOCALIZING 
COMUINED    CONSONANTS. 

If  the  student  hns  become  fiimiliar  with  the  arrnngo- 
nicnt  ami  manner  of  writing  the  long  voweh.  it  will  be 
a  very  easy  matter  for  him  to  undemtund  and  use  the 
following  Hcale  of 


SHORT  VOWELS. 

!e 

1 

la           0 

•iu 

.  u 

et, 

at,           on. 

up, 

foot. 

II 

as  in    tV, 

The  six  vowel  sounds  above  given  approximate  so 
nearly  in  quality  to  those  given  on  page  30,  the  main 
difference  being  in  length  or  fulness,  that  they  are  repre- 
sented in  precisely  the  same  manner,  excepting  that  the 
signs  are  made  lighter.    [See  Introduction,  pages  20,  21.] 

19.  The  proper  sounds  of  these  dots  and  dashes,  in 
their  several  positions,  must  be  well  memorized.  They 
may  be  designated  thus; — i  is  the  first  place  light  dot;  e 
is  the  second  place  light  dot;  a  is  the  third  place  light 
dot;  0  is  the  first  place  light  dash;  U  is  the  second  place 
light  dash;  U  is  the  third  place  light  dash. 

As  a  general  thing  it  is  more  convenient,  and,  except 
in  analyzing  words,  it  is  just  as  well  to  name  the  short 
vowels  with  the  consonant  t  after  them;  thus:  it,  et,  at, 

Ot,  Ut,  OQt. 


r 


b 

a 

t) 


t 
L 

L 


(36) 


Fii 

Sf.< 

Th 

Pii 
f 

Sec 

Thi 


'•  -■    ^  1 


2. 


OT    «- VOCALIZING 
INTS. 

iar  with  the  arriinge- 
in^  vowuIh.  it  will  be 
lerHtund  and  use  the 


-III 
tq), 


foot. 


ivon  approximate  so 
II  pnge  30,  the  main 
9,  that  they  arc  ropre- 
r,  excepting  that  the 
luetion,  pages  20,  21.] 
i  dots  and  dashes,  in 
II  memorized.  They 
irst  place  light  dot;  e 
he  third  place  light 
U  is  the  second  place 
iit  dash. 

iivenient,  and,  except 
II  to  name  the  short 
;hem;  thus:  it,  et,  at, 


>****i*A**Mi«**i*<MHk> 


KXKKC'ISI';   ON    TUK   HiUIRT    VOWKLM. 


37 


The  following  px.t.  .eon  the  ^hort  vowel  hcuIo  should 
be  practiMfd  till  thoii  uonswiitivo  order  is  well  mastered, 
and  the  position  of  oath  sound  can  bo  told  without  hosi- 
tation, 

Readinu  Exercise  II. 


\ 


\ 


J 


1 


N 


% 


WRITINa   EXKRCISE   II. 
First  place  light  DoT.-Pit,  tip,  pil,  pik,  dip,  mil. 
Second  place  light  Dot.— Eb,  ej,  eg,  bd,  to). 
Third  place  light  Dot.— Ad,  am,  )ak,  bak. 
^To"  ZdT  ""'^  1>^««-0J.  of.  top,  get,  ;ok,  lok,  mok, 
Secokd  place  light  Dash.— Up,  us,  kut,  luk,  luv. 
^"!uli,7ull"  "°"^  J>ash._Pu1,  buk,  tuk,  ruk,  luk,  kuk, 


,  ,  »  >  i 


i      :       I  i 


i  ''t 


b*i**<kA**A*ArftallA«i***AA*AAr<i*A*A***A*<k4bkA**AAAA*A*<k«iAAAiA*A< 


38 


MANUAL    OF    PHONOGRAPHY. 


DIPHTHONGS. 


as  m 


u 

tee, 


oil, 


owl, 


new. 


20.  These  diphthong  characters,  excepting  n  ,*  oc- 
cupy but  two  places,  the  beginning  and  end  of  a  conso- 
nant. When  written  in  the  first  place,  with  the  point 
downward,  the  angle  represents  the  first  sound  in  ice; 
thus,  \^  pie,  {^ thy,  ^~^  my;  with  the  point  upward, 
in  the  same  place,  the  first  sound  in  oil;  thus,  \  boy, 
^  coy;  with  the  point  upward,  and  in  the  third  place, 
the  first  sound  in  oicl;  as,  ^^,  our,  -. no^o.  The  char- 
acters should  be  written  without  lilting  the  pen,  a.iJ 
placed  in  a  perpendicular  position  to  the  inclined  and 
horizontal  strokes,  as  well  as  to  the  vertical. 


Reading  Exercise  III. 

J  /-  \.  ^^  vy  1  ;7  ^ 

Writing  Exercise  III. 

Bi,  tj,  f j,  vj,  dj,  si,  fi,  li,  mi,  ni ;  is,  [z,  \\,  {r,  yA.  Bw,  ter, 
jer,  kcf ;  0-1,  aner.     Bs,  ds,  ks,  v»,  s»,  als,  ns ;  wt,  ur,  ts\. 

*  This,  though  ruprcacnling,  ordinarily,  the  pure  (li|ilithonj;,  is  also  om- 
ployed  ill  nn  extended  Sfheine  of  compound  vowels,  which  will  be  treated 
of  herenfler. 


P 

Sj 
T 

F] 

Si 


;^4^^ 


MkAAA**J 


[JRAPHY. 


At 

owl, 


new. 


rs,  excepting  n  ,*  oc- 
2;  and  end  of  a  conso- 
plaec,  with  the  point 
;he  first  sound  in  ice; 
th  the  point  upward, 
i  in  oil;  thus,  \  boy, 
nd  in  the  third  place, 

- noiv.     The  char- 

lifting  the  pen,  a.iJ 
1  to  the  inclined  and 
e  vertical. 


E  III. 

b,  iz.  i'.  V,  isi-    Bw,  ter, 
V,  ills,  ns ;  wt,  tst,  tsI. 


s  pure  diphthnnj;,  is  also  um- 
'owels,  which  will  be  treated 


'"»» A 


THE   DOT   H. 


39 


21.  Dot  ff. — Since  the  aspirate  never  occurs  in  Eng- 
lish except  before  a  vowel,  a  briefer  mode  of  represent- 
ing it  than  the  long  sign  ^  is  generally  employed, 
namely,  a  light  dot  placed  immediately  before  the  vowel; 
it  should  be  written  to  the  left  of  the  dot  vowels  that 
belong  to  a  vertical  or  inclined  stroke,  and  above  those 
belonging  to  horizontals;  and  above  the  dash  vowels  of 
the  former,  and  to  the  left  of  those  of  the  latter;  thus, 
•'I  hit,  ^  hem,  "^|  hod,  "^  her,  ^!^  home. 

Although  this  h  is  the  same  in  shape  as  the  light  dot 
vowels,  it  need  never  lead  to  any  mistake,  from  the  fact 
that  no  dot  vowel  ever  occurs  immediately  before  another 
dot  vowel. 

Reading  Exekcise  IV. 

'\"i  ■^'-  -K  \..r  "I  ^ 
"I  "I  >_>  -x  -/^  ^!  xi'  "v  V 
"I  -^  -v  ^  ^  </^  w 

WaiTING  EXEHCISE   IV. 

"^Z^XkI^^II^^  ''^'  '•'''  ^^''  ^''''  ^^''  '^-p.  w. 

FmsT  PLACE  LIGHT  DoT.— Hip,  hit,  hiq,  hil,  him. 
Second  place  lfght  Dot.— Hed,  hej,  hem. 

^hTpi.'"''^''"    ''"'"''  ^°^— "''''   ^<^>   hag,  hak,  ham,   hao, 

First  place  light  Dash.— Hop,  hot,  hog,  hod. 

Second  place  light  DASH.-Hub,    hut,    huj,    hul,    hum 

Diphthongs.— Hjt,  hjd,  hjv. 


'  ""^^^'•^SSw^liSS^^ 


"•»•*•>»•••** 


'*  ^t-j^f*''^  ' 


40 


MANUAL   OF    PIIONOURAPHY. 


VOCALIZING   COMBINED  CONSONANTS. 

22.  lo  vocalizing  two  or  more  consonants  it  is  very 
important  to  keep  the  vowel  signs  aw'ay  from  the  angles 
or  places  where  the  consonants  join,  especially  from  the 
inside  of  angles,  as  in  such  positions  it  is  impossible  to 
tell  to  which  stroke  they  belong ;  thus,  it  cannot  be  told 
whether  V-^  is  the  word  beam  or  balm. 

The  following  rules  should  be  observed: — 

First.  When  a  first  place  vowel,  or  diphthong,  comes 
between  two  consonants  it  is  placed  immediately  after 
the  firbt ;  as  •  A^  keep,  not  ~~*\ ,  where  it  is  before  the 
second  consonant;  '^"^ —  meek,  not'^"^'^ — ;  /^  kill, 
not •-/     ;   '\-^  ream,  ^    )  kite,  &c. 

Second.  A  second  place  vowel,  if  it  is  long,  is  also 
written  after  the  first  consonant;  as  "^  gate,  |^  dome; 
but  if  short,  it  is  written  before  the  second ;  as  ~^  get, 
IX,  dumb;  by  which  arrangement  we  are  enabled  to  de- 
termine the  sound  of  the  middle  place  vowel  by  position, 
if  it  should  not  be  clearly  indicat«d  by  the  size. 

Third.  Third  place  vowels,  whether  long  or  short,  are 
written  before  the  second  consonant;  as  \— <  balm, 
\  boot,  \    body  \ !  book,      I  doubt. 

XLLUSTRATIYE  EXERCISE. 


L 


^z 


•r«*W<Ws«T«!5>K.i«S*5*|sa«««iiasB^^^ 


k******* 


APHY. 


NS0NANT8. 

)n8onant8  it  is  very 
if&y  from  the  angles 

especially  from  the 
s  it  is  impossible  to 
ua,  it  cannot  be  told 
ilm. 

served: — 

or  diphthong,  comes 
d  immediately  after 
lere  it  is  before  the 

;  ; 1      kill, 

cc. 

f  it  is  long,  is  also 

^  gate,  |^  dome; 
i  second;  as  ^  get, 
e  are  enabled  to  de- 
je  vowel  by  position, 
by  the  size. 
8r  long  or  short,  are 
int;  as  v-<  halm, 
ubt. 


CISE. 


••^^•"»^^»"«"PW¥V»"^^WF^ 


'  *  *  *  'J  '  LLILILLLULL'  :_1L 

VOCAMZINa   COMBINED    CONSONANTS. 


41 


Fourth.  If  two  vowels  come  between  two  consonants, 
the  first  one  spoken  is  written  to  the  first  stroke,  and  the 
next  one  to  the  second;  thus,  \C:^  poem,   \<\  palliate. 

Some  deviations  from  these  rules  occur  in  contracted 
forms  of  writinj,';  but  their  general  observance  renders 
the  manuscript  more  legible  than  it  could  othcrwi.se  be. 

24.  If  two  vowels  precede  the  first  con8oui.nt  in  a 
word,  the  first  is  written  farther  from  it  than  the  second ; 
thus,  "-I  iota;  if  it  terminate  with  two,  the  last  is  writ- 
ten farther  from  the  consonant  sign  ;  as,   f^  iilm. 

25.  When  the  diphthong  ^  commences*  a  word  it 
may  frequently  be  united  with  the  consonant  following, 
without  lifting  the  pen,  as  in  the  word  idea,  jnst  given,' 
'\^\^  I  believe,  'V^  I /ear,  &c. 

26.  In  reading  words  of  two  or  more  consonants,  it 
must  be  observed  that  each  stroke,  and  the  vowel-sign  or 
signs  placed  to  it,  must  be  read  precisely  as  they  would 
be  if  they  stood  unconnected  with  other  consonant 
strokes;  thus,  V^-  read  in  this  way  would  be  considered 
tlius:  \  ,--  )  po-li-cy;  -^r,^  \  r^r^^igh-tUy. 
Ihis  process  will  be  necessary  till  the  learner  can  read 
words  from  their  general  appearance.  , 

Readinq  Exercise  V. 


<^iii^mi^mti^iimam»^' 


HMN 


MmMi 


4  i 
1  I 


n 


b^^k*^<A^il*4M^iA^MMhA*A***<i*aM 


^H 


42 


MANUAL   OF   PHONOORAPHY. 


Writing  Exercise  V. 

Long  Dot  Vowels. — Bet,  bak,  b^r,  peq,  bqm,  pad,  pal,  pqm, 
tern,  dam,  tqr,  ded,  dat,  qep,  q^r,  qer,  <3ef,  kep,  gat,  kel,  gal, 
kqm,  kak,  Jam,  qrk,  qrm,  lep,  lat,  Icif,  nav,  nam,  awak, 
aw^r. 

Short  Dot  Vowels.—  Bit,  pet,  pad,  piq,  beg,  bag,  pil,  del, 
rim,  lip,  lej,  liv,  xaaq,  mej,  maj,  mil,  milk,  vali,  ahed. 

Long  Dash  Vowels. — Bet,  pop,  bo)t,  tet,  dor,  tail,  qek,  jok, 
kel,  kol,  kflol,  godi,  ferm,  vot,  food,  ram,  lof.  mol,  mav, 
neti,  awok. 

Short  Dash  Vowels.— Pot,  bug,  buk,  bodi,  dot,  dot,  dug, 
kuk,  foil,  fuli,  Jok,  Juk,  log,  luk,  luk,  mok,  mug,  muj, 
nok,  nuk. 

DiPHTHoNGS.— Pil,  abjd,  bal,  qid,  q[m,  abst,  mil,  dcke,  delit, 
avsd,  al«d,  enjor,  beler,  filer. 

Get  me  mi  buk.    t  belev  mi  hv.    •"  Ma  j  go  hom  ns.    Put 
awa  mi  dul  nif. 


RsviKW.— (19.)  What  ia  the  «onnd  of  tlio  fir«t  place  light  dot?  The 
second?  The  third?  The  first  pltoe  light  dash?  The  uecond  ?  The 
third?  What  is  the  short  sound  oi  eT  at  nhf  awf  of  ooT  (20.)  To 
what  places  oLthe  consunant  are  the  diphthongs  written  ?  Describe  the 
sign  and  positron  of /.  Oi  oi.  Oi  oia.  (21.)  What  is  the  second  form 
of  the  aspirate?  How  distingui!<hed  from  vowels?  (22.)  In  vocalizing 
combined  consonanti<,  what  is  important?  What  is  the  rule  for  first  place 
vowels ?  Second  place  ?  Third  place  ?  If  two  vo^^els  occur  betwnon  two 
consonants,  how  are  they  written?  (23.)  If  two  vowels  precede  a  conso- 
nant? If  two  terminate  a  word?  (21.)  How  may  J  sometimcb  be  writ- 
ten? (25.)  What  is  the  rule  for  reading  words  containing  tw;>  or  more 
consonants  and  their  accompanying  vowels. 


I 


b( 

va 
hs 
en 
pr 
na 
Tl 
ex 
tio 
let 
wh 

up' 
thi 
qui 
use 
nat 
is  ] 
wai 
ho\< 
sine 


•m0^ 


^k**<i*aM 


RAPIIY. 


* 


>**^*****<i***AAA^A^^^ifc>^^, 


B   V. 

Q,  bqm,  pad,  pal,  pqm, 
•,  qef,  kep,  gat,  kel,  gal, 
,  Iql,  nav,   nam,  awak, 

piq,  beg,  bag,  pil,  del, 
milk,  vali,  ahed. 

tot,  dor,  tail,  (jek,  jok, 
,  ra>in,  lof,  mol,  rkdv. 

k,  bodi,  dot,  doj,  dug, 
,  luk,  mok,  mug,  muj, 

abst,  mil,  dcke,  delit, 

Ma  I  go  horn  ns.    Put 


fir^t  place  light  dot?  The 
dash  ?  The  vecond  ?  The 
ihf  awf  of  ooT  (20.)  To 
ngs  written  ?  DeKribe  the 
)  What  is  the  aecond  form 
)wel3  7  (22.)  In  vocalizing 
hat  19  the  rule  for  first  place 
TO  voxels  occur  between  two 
two  vowels  precede  a  conso- 
r  may  1  sometimes  be  writ- 
rds  oontaiaing  \,vo  or  more 


wwm'r'rm'vw^f^w^wwww^'r^w^ 


»»»> 


UP-STROKES  R,  SH,  AND  Z- VOWEL  WORD-SIQNS,  *o. 

26.     In  order  to  prevent  words  from  running  too  far 
below  the  line  for  convenience  or  beauty,  and  to  afford  a 
variety  of  skeleton  outlines,  by  which  different  words 
I    having  the  same  consonant  sounds  may  be  written  differ- 
ently, and  thus  be  distinguished  without  being  vocalized 
provision  is  made  for  representing  several  of  the  conso- 
nant sounds  by  both  upward  and  downward   strokes, 
ibis  provision   also   makes  the  writing  more   easy  of 
execution,  since  these  up-strokes  are  all  in  the  inclina- 
tion  of  the  line   of  writing,  from  left  to  right.     The 
letters  thus  represented  are  r,  sh,  and  I;  the  latter  of 
which,  only,  requires  a  different  character. 

27.  The  second  sign  for  r  is  a  straight  line  struck 
upward  at  an  angle  of  thirty  degrees;  thus,  ^  Though 
this  character  is  specially  available  in  writing  words  re- 
quiring two  or  more  consonants,  yet  it  is  frequently 
used  alone,  as  ^  rye;  and  more  frequently  when  termi- 
nating with  a  circle  or  hook,  (Lessons  IV,  VI,)  when  it 
18  less  hkely  to  be  confounded  with  ch,  written  down- 
ward and  of  nearly  the  same  inclination;  in  neither  case 
however,  is  there  any  difficulty  experienced  by  the  adept' 
since  the  sense  of  the  preceding  words  nearly  always 
suggests  what  the  following  word  is. 

28.     When  written  in  connection  with  other  conso- 
nants,  there  is  never  any  ambiguity,  since  it  can  be  seen 


r'^•r•^^W'^^^ 


»^^w 


" » I.  ^. 

(48) 


I  yrwtinia 


■iM 


u 


MANUAL   OK   IMIONOOUAI'HV. 


at  a  glance  whether  the  btroko  is  written  upward  or 
downward;  thuH,  |/  ft;  J  teh,  /\  rt.  J^o  tliat  while 
the  rule  is  that  vh  shall  be  written  at  an  angle  uf  sixty 
degrees,  and  r  at  an  angle  of  thirty  degrees,  they  may 
both  be  written  at  the  same  inclination,  except  when 
either  is  the  only  consonant  in  a  word,  and  except,  also, 
when  one  of  them  immediately  follows  the  other,  as  /y , 
in  which  case  necessity  compels  one  to  be  written  at  a 
different  inclination  from  the  other 

29.  The  rule  that  the  Iteginnlng  of  a  consonant  stroke 
is  where  the  first-place  vowel  is  written,  and  the  frnnina- 
tion  of  a  stroke  the  third-place,  must  be  observed  in 
vocalizing  this  up-stroke  r;  thus,  ^  each,  ^\  rijae, 
/y]  charity.  , 

RULES  FOR  WRITINQ  H  UPWARD  OR  DOWNWARD* 

30.  The  following  rules  in  regard  to  the  use  of  the 
two  forms  of  r,  will  guide  the  learner  to  the  best  forms 
of  words: 

First.  The  up-stroke  should  be  used  when  the  follow- 
ing consonant  is  to  be  written  downward,  as  in  the 
examples  above.     (29.) 

Seamd.  When  r  is  the  initial  lett«r  of  a  word,  and  is 
followed  by  the  8-circle,  ri-hook,  (see  Lessons  IV  and 
VIII,)  k,  g,  f,  I,  or  another  r,  the  up-stroke  is  employed; 
as  y^^  rogue,  ^1  rash,  ^(  rule,  yf^  rare.  But 
if  a  vowel  precede  r  as  the  first  consonant,  the  down- 
stroke  is  employed;  as,  ^ —  arc,^\  Irish,  -pearly, 
^-^  error. 

Thira.  Whenever  preceded  by  v,  th,  or  m,  the  upward 
r  is  employed ;  as  \^  veer,    (\y  theory,   <p^ mire. 

*  These  rules  may  l)u  piissed  uver  witlioat  much  studying  at  first ;  but 
on  reviewing  the  le?son»-they  should  bo  well  understood  and  applied. 


R 


Jen 


>^»i»»»»»»»»*W^»**^»***W"i^»^»^»WW»^l'*<I^^W*^l^*«'<«»»**»'»'»' 


T" 


KAl'HV. 

i  written  upward  or 
'I  rt.  So  tliiit  wliile 
at  an  angle  of  sixty 
ty  degrees,  tliey  may 
nation,  extopt  when 
jrd,  and  except,  also, 
)ws  the  other,  as  yy, 
c  to  be  written  at  a 

of  a  consonant  stroke 

tten,  and  the  term  in  a- 

nust  be  observed  in 

i^  eacfh  4^  ripe, 

OR  DOWNWARD* 

ard  to  the  use  of  the 
uer  to  the  best  forma 

ised  when  the  follow- 
lownward,  as  in    the 

t«r  of  a  word,  and  is 
(see  Lessons  IV  and 
ip-stroke  is  employed; 
it/e,  ^^  rare.  But 
cojisonant,  the  down- 
^^     IrUh,    "^  early, 

I  </i,  or  m,  the  upward 
theory,   <p^  mire. 

nuch  studying  at  first ;  but 
I  understood  and  applied. 


rw^r^w^rmm^'Fmwvww^'m 


is  employed;  /^  rainy,  ^ 


" -'  •-•  •  ;u  L 


MAA*****A*ik^ 


ON    WaiTINU    THE     UP-8TR0KK 


45 


Fourth.  Whenever  followed  by  n  or  ng  the  up-stroke 


rung. 


Fijth.  When  r  is  the  final  stroke  consonant  \u  a  word, 
and  followed  hy  a  vowel,  the  vj>-»troke  is  to  be  used,  as  in 
the  words  \y  herry,  ^  airy;  but  if  no  vowel  fol- 
lows,  the  down-stroke  is  employed;  as  V  yww, 'N^  cur. 

Hixth.  When  one  r  follows  another,  except  at  the  be- 
ginning of  a  word  when  preceded  by  a  vowel  (as  in 
error.)  they  are  both  written  upward;  as  ^.^t^  rarity, 

s/f^  carrier. 
Si'xenth.    When   followed   by  m,  the   down-stroke  is 


always  used ;  as  \^  room 


>v- 


I'luirm, 


Reading  Exercise  VI 

1/^   \^  VI  V^  ^A  .^/ 

V^  -^    ^^  ^.^  V   W 

Writing  Exercise  VI. 

Repel,  retjr,  redem,  redi,  ratifj,  ravaj,  pqrti,  derid,  ariv, 
"••j,   ert;   raf,   rak,   riketi. 

Boro,  fori,  jvori,  teori,  kari,  memori,  rotari,  turoli,  mer 
demqr,  admjr.  .  ' 

Random,  reform,   raflk,  reanimar,  adoriu. 

Boroer,  borer,  barier,  inferior,  naroer,  kurier,  miror,  derer, 
Jercr,  karer. 

[Down-stroke  A]     Rem,  rjm,  remedi,  remoav. 


^w^^ww^ 


BilMNi 


>m 


mtm  .jmmmmm' 


b^^^*4l****<M 


46 


MANUAL   OF   PIIONOOBAPHy. 


RULES  FOB  WRITING  L  AND  ^//.» 

31.  L  and  »h  may  be  written  upward  or  downward 
without  any  change  of  form;  and  in  vocalizing,  or  read- 
ing, the  direction  in  which  they  were  made,  as  in  the  case 
of  the  up-stroke  r,  will  be  known  by  their  connection 
with  other  consonant  signs ;  as  (_J,  long,  C\  leave,  <^ 
ihop,  J    ahawl. 

32.  The  following  rules  will  guide,  as  near  as  possi- 
ble, to  the  most  approved  uhc  of  I: 

First.  When  I  is  the  initial  letter  of  a  word,  and  fol- 
lowed by  k,  .7,  or  wi,  the  up-stroke  I  is  employed;  as 
C  lilii;  f^         Imque,  /T^  limb.     But  if  a  vowel 

precedes,  the  down-stroke  is  used,  as  £_  alike,  C-^  helm. 
When  other  consonants  follow  Ik,  Ig,  Ini,  the  I  may  be 
written  either  upward  or  downward. 

Second.  Immediately  before  and  after  n  and  ng,  the 
doVh-stroke  is  employed;  as  ^  nail,  Q, —  link.  If  a 
down -stroke  letter  is  to  follow  /  after  n,  the  up-stroke  I 
must  be  employed;  as   ^^J' analogy,  \^'  \  annihilate. 

Third.  When  I  is  the  final  consonant  in  a  word,  and 
preceded  by  /,  v,  or  upward  r,  without  a  final  vowel,  it 
is  written  downward;   as  K^   feel,    -^V    revile,  ^-^^f 

moral.     But  if  a  vowel  follows,  the  up-stroke  is  used ,  as 

^^Z'  folly,     ..---^  ^e¥ 

Fourth.  After  n  and  ng,  a  final  I  is  always  written 
downward,  even  though  followed  by  a  vowel,  as  C^  lonely, 
'~^-  kingly. 

Fifth.  Final  I,  following  all  other  consonants  but/,  v, 
up  stroke  r,  n  and  ng,  is  written  upward,  whether  a  vowel 
follows  or  not;  as  \/^  peal,  /^  cool,  /t^/      mail. 


*  The  8»me  remarks  will  apply  to  these  rules  as  are  given  in  a  note  on 
the  preceding  page. 


^■^^^"•■v^ 


ai 
at 


\ 


N( 
dowi 


lAPHY. 


lXD  SH.* 

pward  or  downward 
1  vocalizing,  or  read- 
made,  as  in  the  case 
by  their  connection 
long,   C\   leave,  <^ 

le,  as  near  as  possi- 

r  of  a  word,  and  fol- 
e  Ms  employed;  as 
lib.  But  if  a  vowel 
1  ^2L  alike,  V-N  heb/i. 
Iff,  Im,  the  I  may  be 

after  n  and  ng,  the 
lil,  (^^ —  link.  If  a 
jr  n,  the  up-stroke  I 
y,  vj/'  I  annihilate. 
onant  in  a  word,  and 
lout  a  final  vowel,  it 
•^^  rcwt'fc,  ,^-^{ 
ap-stroke  is  used,  as 

I  is  always  written 
a  vowel,  as  C^  lonely, 

consonants  but/,  v, 
rard,  whether  a  vowel 
cool,  /-Tv/      mail. 


ON     WHITINO    I    AND     > 


47 


33    M  .8  usually  written  downward;  before  /,  however, 
and  after  /  and  .,  it  is  nearly  always  written  upward- 

Reading  Exercise  VII. 

^  K  A  /J  ^ 


^ 


Writino  Exercise  VII. 

Lek,  Ijk,  luk,  log,   lom,  legasi, 
kanaj;-anaht.k,  analoji,  enlqrj;-fi/,  f,/,  vj^,  unfaZifl,  reve/i 
R4  rea/,  ra/,  re/m,  karo?,  bare?,  peri?, 

-/ll',  /el,  /aIo;-da/;   navi/   efi/ensi,   defi/ensi. 
-ffeli/,   ffflli/,   publij,   polij,   abolij,  rajli. 


II  I  I  


■MaHi 


"*•**» 


I    j 


--^--^ t»il«IHi« «' 

48  MANIAI.   OK    I'llliNOdllAI'IIV 


-.-.-.-.-«-.. 


VOWKI,  WORnSKJNS. 
34.  By  a  woid-iign  w  meant  the  use  of  a  t\n^\e 
character  of  tho  alphabet  to  represent  on  entire  word. 
ThiH  scheme  is  rcHorted  to  that  the  penman  may  attain 
greater  Hpeed  in  writinff;  and  thoHe  words  are  chosen 
thus  to  be  represented  which  occur  tlie  most  frequently 
in  composition;  twenty-tivo  of  them  actually  coustitutinj,' 
one-fourth  of  any  frivcn  chapter  or  discourse,  and  one 
hundred  of  them  aniountiiit;  to  almost  half.  The  sif^ns 
are  so  chosen  us  to  sufrni^st,  generally,  the  words  they 
represent.  Words  thus  represented  are  called  tu/n-vonh, 
when  we  wish  to  distinguish  them  from  other  words. 


the 
"ail" 


and, un 
I 


bow 


two 


already        oh  ought         who 


of 


to 


or 


but 


on       should 


35.  Only  two  places,  the  first  and  last,  or  above  and 
on  the  line,  are  used  in  writing  the  vowel  word-signs, 
because  without  a  consonant  it  would  be  impossible  to 
determine  between  a  first  and  second-place  position.  If 
the  word  to  be  represented  contains  a  first-place  vowel 
sound,  the  sign  is  written  above  the  line;  if  a  second  or 
third-place,  it  is  written  on  the  line.  No  confusion 
arises  from  bringing  second-place  vowels  down  to  the 
third  position,  since,  when  the  second-place  sign  is 
thus  transferred,  the  third-place  sign  is  not  used  as  a 
word-sign,  and  when  the  third  is  used  the  second  is  not. 
. , .  .YTTTTTTTTTTTTnTTTTITT n>.-">'^TT7 


/ 


'vJ, 


-  niiifi 


4lM««> 


'^^^^^^.t^gk 


lAI'HV. 


Nfl. 

the    use  of  a  Hinf?le 

sent  an  entire  word. 

penniiin  may  attain 
HO  worils  are  thoHcn 

the  inoHt  iVequcntly 

nctually  coiit'titHtinj; 
r  (liscdnrne,  and  one 
u()«t  hiilf.  Tlie  sit,'ns 
rally,  the  words  they 

are  called  Ki(fn-u'or<h, 
Prom  other  wordH. 


>M«*****|M 


how 


ought 


who 


it  on        should 

nd  last,  or  above  and 
the  vowel  word-signi*, 
3uld  be  impossible  to 
nd-plaee  position.  If 
ns  a  first-place  vowel 
lie  line;  if  a  second  or 
1  line.  No  confusion 
Q  vowels  down  to  the 
second-place  sign  is 
sign  is  not  used  as  a 
used  the  second  is  not. 


UARKH    or    PUNCTUATION. 


49 


36.  Thf.  is  a  word-sign  that  often  follows  imniodiatoly 
after  most  of  the  others,  and  in  order  to  avoid  lifting  the 
pen  to  write  each  separately,  it  is  joined  to  the  preceding 
sign  in  the  shape  of  a  light  tick;  thus,  ^  of  the,^  on  the, 
^  to  the. 

Makks  of  Punctuation:  x  period,  J  colon,  J  in- 
terrogation, II  wonder,  J  grief,  F  laughter,  {  >  paren- 
lieses;  the  comma  and  semi-colon  may  be  written  as  in 
common  manuscript. 

An  emphatic  word  or  sentence  is  indicated  by  a  waved 
line  being  drawn  beneath  it;  thus,  '^;  if  it  is  desired  to 
indicate  that  a  word  should  commence  with  a  capital  let- 
ter, it  is  shown  by  two  parallel  lines  being  written  under 
it;  thus,  ^ 

BEASIKa  EXKROISK  Till. 

\ 

j-     >     .1  V      I  -V      IV  V 

I  I     X        ..I     •  U->    J     I    V-.-'a' 


-/  I- 


U,  ■^Ax^'V 


' .  r}^ 


\rr 


X 


5 


'■  II 


Writing  Exercise  VIII. 

NoT«.— In  the  fullowlng  »n<I  »  few  aubaequont  exoroiiei  the  algn-wordi 
thui  fur  Intruducua  will  be  iniliontpd  hy  being  encloied  in  ({UoUtino 
marlia.  Aa  udaitlunftt  iiuea  are  apuken  of,  tbejr  will  be  imlloRteU  In  the 
aaine   wny. 

When  the  may  be  united  with  a  preoodlng  word,  Ihejr  will  be  connected 
by  >  hyphen. 

Gftriti  tnriot  Joji;  hidull  muq  rop;  qorijot  'no'  il;  nperot  holli 
Itivli  ntniu)  uh.  'JlC  «rt  'and'  'dc'  qr.  A  livli  'and'  hnpi,  'but' 
gidi,  ber.     *  o  nu»ip.     '«'le'  liet  'ov-de'  fir.     Go  'tu-de'  dor. 

He  'ma'  rji  'el-de'  tim.  U  'it'  'on-rte'  /olf.  Qo  'tu'  'mi'  Jop 
'and'  rifl  'dc'  bel.  CI  Jadi  porq  'and'  kailiy  Jsor.  'Ma'  hqrmoni 
lojo  abiii  'in'  sr  qurq. 

PiDlif  bor!  'hs'  dur  'he'  lavi/  'mi'  muni  'on'  'jo'  vi/us  a  pol- 
isi?    '01'  '\m'  'no'  'de'  rit  '/ud'  'doi'  'it.' 


Review. — (25.}  Which  are  the  letter*  that  may  b<i  written  either  up- 
ward or  downward?  (27.'|  Explain  the  np-atruku  r  aa  oumparvd  with  en. 
(28.)  In  worda  oonlaining  more  than  one  oonKonnnt,  how  la  up-atroke  r 
dlatlngulahed  from  chf  (29. )  Where  are  the  f irat  and  third  place  Towola 
put  tu  the  up-atroke  rf  (ItO.)  Give  the  firat  rule  for  writing  r/  the  aec- 
ond,  ditto;  third;  fourth;  fifth;  aixth;  aeventb?  (31.)  How  ia  it  determined 
when  the  atrokea  »h,  i;  I  are  written  upward?  (^2.)  Qive  the  firat  rule 
for  writing  I;  the  aeuond:  third;  fourth;  fifth?  (33.)  Urdor  what  oiroum- 
atanoo  ia  »h  nearly  nlwaya  written  upward  7  (34. )  What  ia  a  word-aign  7 
Explain  the  difl'uronoe  between  a  word-aign  and  a  aign-word.  (3i.) 
What  ia  the  word  repreaented  by  the  firat  place  heavy  dot  7  The  third 
place  heavy  dot  7  Tnird  place  light  dot?  The  diphthonga?  What  throe 
worda  doea  the  firat  place  heavy  daah  represent  ?  What  three  the  third 
place  heavy  doah  7  What  three  the  firat  place  light  daah  7  What  throe 
the  third  place  li^ht  dash?  (36.)  What  ia  the  practice  in  writing  <A« 
after  other  word-aigni. 


»*W»»»»W«^^W^^^»^^^^»»^r^»»»W*^»^^r^^F»^»»<»*^*'«^^^^^l^>» 


«^, 


kAAA^l^«i**M 


KIHAl'HY. 


IE   VIII. 

quant  sxorolui  the  »lgn-wordl 
being  uncloaed  in  i{U0Utinn 
they  will  be  indionteU  In  tbe 

g  word,  they  will  be  connected 

orijoft  'no'  il;  nperot  holli 
.  A  Ijvli  'nnd'  hnpi,  'but' 
:e'  fir.     Go  'tu-de'  dor, 

de'  /olf.  Qo  'tu'  'mi'  Jop 
LU)/iu  Jsor.    'Ma'  hcirnioni 

muni  'on'  'so'  vi/ua  a  pol- 
'it.' 


■at  may  bn  written  either  up- 
-Htruko  r  lU  aurnparod  with  ca. 
jonHnnant,  how  la  up-stroke  r 
lio  firit  and  third  place  Tuwola 
'at  rule  fur  writing  r;  the  aeu- 
li?  (»t.)  How  ia  it  determined 
•d?  (32.)  Give  the  first  rule 
1?  (33.)  Urdor  what  oiroum- 
'  (34. )  What  ia  a  word-aign  7 
ign  and  a  aiKn-word.  (35.) 
plaoe  heavy  dot  7  The  third 
the  diphthongi*7  What  throe 
asont  7  What  three  the  third 
iooo  light  dash  7  What  throo 
ia  the  practice  in  writing  (A« 


^^T^^fw^W'rt^^'^r^^^'wirww 


*****<>***^******^iX^^i»*  «o^<n^ 


ItSBDH    ft. 


THE  CHICLE  S  AND  Z-OOU,  CON,  ISO,  AND  MP- 
CPNSONANT  W0RD-8IUN8. 

The  fact  that  a  and  z  represent  sounds  of  very  fre- 
quent recurrence,  rondorH  it  neccHsary,  in  order  to 
secure  the  greiitest  brevity  and  beauty  in  writing,  that 
they  bo  fttrnished  with  an  additional  sign.  Indeed, 
each  Bubeequent  chapter  of  these  lessons  is  but  to 
introduce  some  more  abbreviated  method  of  writing ; 
which,  while  it  seems  to  render  the  system  more  com- 
plex, adds  to  it  new  beauty  as  well  as  value. 

37.  The  second  forms  for  t  and  z  are,  a  small  circle, 
made  light  for  the  first,  and  thickened  on  one  side  for 
the  latter;  thus,  o  «,  o  t;  the  thickening  of  the  2-circle, 
however,  is  scarcely  ever  necessary,  as  the  sense  will 
nearly  always  indicate  whether  the  circle  should  be  <  or 
z.  Where  great  precision  is  requisite,  the  stroke  z 
should  Le   used. 

The  circle  is  used  much  more  frequently  than  the 
stroke  «;  it  is  employed,  however,  only  in  connection 
with  stroke  consonants,  except  as  a  word-sign.  The 
table  on  the  following  page  will  assist  the  learner  in 
fixing  in  his  mind  the  peculiar  connection  the  circle  has 
with  each  long  sign ;  it  will  also  be  of  service  for  refer- 
ence, in  writing  out  the  exercises  in  the  lesson. 


(61) 


J 


•MfiAMMMiai 


52 


MANUAL   OF   PHONOGRAPHY. 


TABLE  OP  THE   CIRCLE  S. 


!^ 


\ 


sp 


r 


St 


/^  sch 


sk 


\  sb  I    sfl  y°  sj  Q —  sg 

V  sf  (^  sth  J  ss  ^  BSll 

V  sv               y  sth               j  sz  ^  szh 
6     si                   )  sr  o/'sr 

sm        Q_>  sn  ?_^  sng  *^  sw        Z'  «A 

38.  The  stroke  i/  never  takes  an  initial  circle,  because 
not  needed;  it  is  used  on  its  termination,  however.  The 
table  presents  the  circle  written  only  at  the  initial  end 
of  the  strokes,  whereas  it  may  be  written  at  either  end, 
according  as  it  is  desired  to  read  before  or  after  the 
stroke ;  thus,  \o  pa,  — o  ks,  ~^  ws,  ^  ha;  and  it  may 
also,  of  course,  be  written  between  two  strokes;  thus, 

I  kst,  \si__^fm. 

39.  The  learner  must  observe  the  following  rules  in 
writing  the  circle : 

First.  On  all  the  straight  vertical  and  inclined  strokes 
it  is  written  on  the  right-hand  side,  both  beginning  and 
end. 

Second.  On  the  straight  horizontal  signs,  which  in- 
clude the  up-stroke  r,  since  it  is  nearer  horizontal  than 
verticiti,  it  is  written  on  the  upper  side. 

Third.  It  is  written  on  the  inner  or  concave  side  of 
all  the  curved  signs.  Compare  the  foregoing  with  the 
table. 

Fourth.  When  it  comes  between  two  consonants  it  is 
turned  in  the 
•^ — js_>  man. 


shortest  way;  thus,  j tak,  ^\^chm, 


•"rww^rwwwvw^nrv 


OGRAPHV. 


IRCLE  S. 

sen 


J  ss 

1 


sz 


sk 

sg 
^  Bsh 
_^  szh 


cy^sr 


/sh 


an  initial  circle,  because 
lination,  however.  The 
only  at  the  initial  end 
3  written  at  either  end, 
Bad  before  or  after  the 
ws,  ^  ha;  and  it  may 
reen  two  strokes;  thus, 

e  the  following  rules  in 

cal  and  inclined  strokes 
de,  both  beginning  and 

zontal  signs,  which  in- 
nearer  horizontal  than 
it  Bide. 

oer  or  concave  side  of 
the  foregoing  with  the 

in  two  consonants  it  is 
lius,  J (ak,  ^^chm, 


vwvwrvwwrwwwwv^nv 


kA4Mk*A*A*A«al 


>«ii«l  ««m  I  I  I 11 


ON   WRITING   THE   CIRCLE  8  AND   Z. 


53 


40.  In  vocalizing  words  in  which  the  circle  «  is  used, 
the  vowel-signs  are  to  be  placed  to  the  strokes  before 
which  or  after  which  they  are  heard,  without  any  refer- 
ence to  the  circle.  As  rules  to  assist  the  learner  in 
reading  words  containing  the  circle  »,  the  following  ob- 
servations are  sufficiently  explicit : 

First.  If  there  is  n  initial  circle,  it  is  always  read 
first,  and  then  the  vowel  Jthat  precedes  the  stroke,  and 
lastly  the  stroke  itself,   as  T  «ea«,  o-^  sackX"   soul. 

Second.  If  no  vowel  precedes  the  stroke,  the  circle, 
stroke,  and  following  vowel  are  read,  in  the  order 
named ;  as  \  9>y,  j-  s(nw, «     '     scale. 

Third.  When  the  circle  terminates  a  word,  it  isialways 
the  last  to  be  read;  as,  (^  this,  -^  goes,  /^^  foo/b, 
•S""^  seerM,  ^  enjoys,  /<,  suppose;  when  written  between 
two  strokes,  its  relation  to  the  vowels  is  alw^iys  evident, 
as  will  be  seen  in  examining  ^  lessen,       "I    excite. 

Reading  Exercise  IX. 

•f  \  r   f-  T  y°  /■  ■=-  .^  ,( 
J  ^  .r  I-  -^  ^^  ^  e 

c  ,^..u-  /^'  on  ^n-  li,  X 


''>^'^'^'*'i^''mmmmmmmmmmmm)mmmmmmmmm^v9m9m 


M«  •III 


wmmm 


54  MANUAL  OF   PHONOGRAPHY. 


II J 


,.| 


Writing  Exercise  IX. 

Sip,  smp,  sap,  sop,  set,  sid,  set,  set,  sej,  suq,  sek,  sok,  sav, 
Bid,  8«^,  sez,  sajf,  s§r,  stst,  sel,  sol,  sam,  sum,  sin,  san,  sig, 
sngk. 

Spi,  sta,  ski,  sla,  slo,  slj,  sna  Pes,  daz,  qez,  jcrz,  gas, 
fez,  vis.    ais,  doz,  foz,  raz,  rjs,  ^rz,  las,  mis,  nis. 

Spek,  spok,  skem,  sfer,  slep,  slak,  smok,  sincl,  snal,  siflk. 
Beato,  beset,  task,  itsolf,  spas,  spesifi,  skiz,  siksti,  a^kjus, 
sedijus,  risk,  resit,  rezn,  deniz,  solas,  holincs,  Qozn,  mason. 

41.  There  are  four  cases  where  the  long  s  or  a  must 
always  be  employed :  First,  when  it  is  the  only  stroke 
consonant  in  a  word;  as,  *)  ace,  )  ease,  )-»o.  Second, 
when  it  is  the  first  consonant  and  preceded  by  a  vowel ; 

as  .) ask,    V-y  escape.      Third,   when    two   distinct 

vowel  sounds  come  between  the  s  and  following  conso- 
nant; as  in  the  word  Zis>  science.  Fourth,  when  8  or  z  is 
the  last  consonant  in  a  word  and  followed  by  a  vowel; 
a,B-^'  qlso,  '^^  palsy.  Fifth,  when  z  commences  a 
word ;  as    K      zeal,   \^  Zion. 

42.  When  the  sound  of  «  or  z  is  heard  twice  in  the 
same  syllable,  either  of  two  forms  may  be  used,  ss,  j  or 
')  ss;  if  the  last  sound  is  that  of  z  the  circle  shoulu  be 
made  first  and  the  stroke  be  written  heavy;  thus,  ^)  size. 

43.  When  the  indistinct  vowel  i  or  e  comes  between 
M  or  an  «  and  a  z,  or  between  zz,  in  the  middle  or  at  the 
end  of  a  word,  the  syllable  is^  represented  by  a  circle 
double  the  usual  size;  thus,  \o pieces,  ^^chooses,  XO 
suffices,  "^D^necessary.  It  should  never  begin  a  word,  as 
in  system,.  In  the  word  exercise,  it  is  allowable  to  put  the 
diphthong  /  in  the  double  circle,  thus,    jl^. 


b< 
ze 


eg 


as 
se 

W( 

li^ 
th 
\ 


us 
sy 
&c 


>*www«^v«^^ 


yit^^^^ttk^ 


>*ik****<k^k^ 


3BAPHT. 


!E   IX. 


t,  sej,  suq,  sek,  sok,  sav, 
lam,  sum,   sin,  8a>n,  sig, 

Pes,  daz,  qez,  jcrz,  gas, 
;,  las,  mis,  nis. 

smok,  smcl,  snal,  sigk. 
lifj,  skiz,  sikst,  agkjus, 
,  holinos,  QozD,  mason. 

I  the  long  8  or  2  must 
n  it  ia  the  only  stroke 
)  ease,  j-so.  Second, 
1  preceded  by  a  vowel ; 
i,  when  two  distinct 
and  following  conso- 
Fourth,  when  8  or  z  is 
followed  by  a  vowel; 
,  when  a  commences  a 

;  is  heard  twice  in  the 

!  may  be  used,  ss,    j  or 

z  the  circle  should  be 

en  heavy ;  thus,  ^)  size. 

;1  i  or  e  comes  between 

n  the  middle  or  at  the 

jpresented  by  a  circle 

pieces,  ^^  chooses,  Xo 

never  begin  a  word,  as 

is  allowable  to  put  the 

thus,    ^. 


PEEFIXE8   COif    AND   COA'— AFFIX    ING. 


55 


44.  The  circle  is  used  as  a  word-sign  for  is,  written 
above  the  line,  thus,  ° ;  and  for  as,  written  on  the  line, 
thus,  oj   with   the  dot  aspirate   prefixed  they  become 

his,  .0  has. 

Beadinq  Exercise  X. 


L-'°)  ^-.^^  L^V- 


Writing  Exercise  X. 

fisa,  jsi,  as'.ep,  esp^zal,  asjnz,  sjonz ;  —  bizi,  spisi,  lazi, 
hersa,  eksclonsi,  olwtinasi,  epilepsi,  sufi'ensi;— zooloji,  zero, 
zelusli,  z' '  ■^^, 

Sea,  Sht     ,    , 

Bnsic,  c      ■ 
egzist,  pozesor. 


' .  3,  sisorz,  Bizm. 

'^jDzez,  kisez,  dibkusez,  visez,  vnsez,  relesez, 


THE  PREFIXES  COM  AND   (70A'-THE  AFFIX  INO. 

45.  For  the  sake  of  rendering  Phonography  as  brief 
as  possible,  a  few  arbitrary  signs  are  used,  for  the  repre- 
sentation of  prefixes  and  syllables  in  such  words  as 
would  be  inconvenient  to  write  out  in  full.  Thus,  a 
light  dot  placed  at  the  beginning  of  a  word  expresses 
the  prefix  com  or  con;  as,  |^  condemn,  Y'  cwuole; 
^-    compare. 

46.  A  similar  dot  placed  at  the  end  of  a  word  is 
used  to  represent  the  termination  ing,  when  a  separate 
syllable;  as, »!  aiding,  <\  ^  living.  Ring,  thing,  bring, 
&c.,  are  written  with  the  stroke .     It  is  often  more 


aju 


'---"'^'■-'-''■fltl'--''--"-'-"--'"''--'--"" 


56 


HANHAL   OF   PHONOORAPHT. 


convenient,  especially  when  followiiig  the  circle  «  or  up- 
stroke r,  to  write  the  alphabetic  ng;  as  \^_^^  pamiig, 
\ci  .  confeming,  /  rising;  and  after  b,  bl,  br,  th, 
m;  a6^^~A,^^nothing,  ^  ^^  ''seeming.  Generally  ^""^ 
is  written  for  ings;  as  N^  ^  beings,  y(^  rtjoicings.  A 
largt  dot  may  be  used  when  more  convenient;  as  |  do- 
ings, t/\  hexidings. 

47.  Mp. — The  stroke  for  m  is  the  only  one  that  is 
not  given  in  the  alphabet  heavy  as  well  as  light;  and  in 
order  to  make  good  use  of  all  the  means  the  alphabet 
affords,  this  stroke  written  heavy  is  made  to  represent 
the  not  unfrequent  combination  of  m  with  p,  either  at 
the  beginning,  middle,  or  end  of  a  word;  thus,  C^ 
empire,    [^^^y^  temporary,  ^        lamp. 


Wbitinq  Exercise  XI. 

Komit,  kompoz,  kompil,  kompozig,  kombat,  kontaminat, 
kontenjus,  konvinsif),  konva,  konspir,  konspirasi,  konsolatori, 
konsuljip,  kons^rvatizm,  konjusues; — paip,  hopiu,  djij),  etip, 
goip,  herip,  ferifl. 

Pump,  tempi,  temporal,  damp,  jumpip,  rump,  tump,  sim- 
plifi,  simplisiti,  egzampl,  romp,  limp. 

.         CONSONANT  WORD-SIGNS. 

On  the  following  page  is  given  an  alphabetic  arrange- 
ment of  all  the  simple  consonant  word-signs.  Let  them 
be  copied  a  few  times  in  the  order  presented,  which,  in 
connection  with  the  powers  of  the  letters,  will  enable 
the  mind  to  recollect  the  words  for  which  they  stand. 
The  circle  s  may  be  added  to  any  consonant  sign  for  the 
formation  of  plural  nouns,  or  the  third  person  singular, 
present  tense,  of  verbs ;  thus, ' — *'  things,  ^  advantttges, 
D  comASS,  (      thinks. 


^^m^0m^mmr^mmm^^-''^^^^f9^'^mp9i^^rmi^¥m'^*wt>>mm'^f'i^mm^wmw9i^ 


•aKAPHY. 


¥i!ig  the  circle  «  or  up- 
0  ng;  as  \,^^^  passing, 
d  after  b,  bl,  br,  th, 
ning.  Generally  """^ 
',  y^^^  rejoicings.  A 
>  oonvenicnt;  as    |  do- 

8  the  only  one  that  is 
swell  as  light;  and  in 
le  means  the  alphabet 
is  made  to  represent 
of  m  with  p,  either  at 
)f  a  word;  thus,  <>/ 
lamp. 

SB  XI. 

sig,  kombat,  kontaminat, 

konspirasi,  konsolatori, 

—pain,  hopiB,  djij),  etip, 

mpig,  ramp,  tump,  sim- 


.-SIGNS. 

an  alphabetic  arrange - 
word-signs.  Let  them 
er  presented,  which,  in 
he  letters,  will  enable 
for  which  they  stand, 
consonant  sign  for  the 
i  third  person  singular, 
'  things,   ^  advantcyes. 


vww^iiv^POTM^wvww^rvw* 


CONSONANT    WORD-SIGNS. 


\  np 
\be 

V^  for 
V  have 


CONSONANT  WORD-SIGNS. 

it  y  which         __  i  J'ingdom 

(  come 

f  give-n 


I  do 

(  think 
(   them 

r'  will- 


,  I  ™e,  my 
(him 


/  advantage  \  f^®"" 

"  ( together 

}  80  _y  shall 

J  was  ^  usual-ly 

)  are 

A: 


^  ( thing 
( language 


in 
no 

way  ^    /^your. 

48.  In  the  above,  and  all  other  lists  of  word-signs, 
when  a  word  is  printed  with  a  hyphen,  as  give-n,  the  sign 
will  represent  either  the  whole  word,  or  only  so  much  as 
precedes  the  hyphen,  which  is,  by  itself  another  word; 
thus,  is  either  give  or  given.  Such  words  being 
nearly  alike  in  sound,  and  yet  diflFerent  parts  of  speech, 
or  otherwise  incapable  of  being  taken  one  for  the  other,' 
cause  no  difficulty  to  the  reader. 

49.  Inasmuch  as  the  horizontal  strokes  do  not  fill 
the  space  which  a  line  of  writing  occupies,  they  are 
made  to  represent  two  words,  as  in  the  case  of  the  vowel 
word-signs,  one  above  the  line  and  the  other  on  the 
line — those  written  above  the  line  containing  first-place 
vowels;  those  on  the  line,  second  or  third-place. 

50.  There  are  but  three  exceptions  to  this  rule  of 
position,  (See  §16,)  namely:  antf,  though  its  accented 
vowel  is  second-place,  is  written  above  the  line,  so  that 
if  left  unvocaliaed  it  will  not  be  confounded  with  no; 
him,  containing  a  first-place  vowel,  is  written  on  the  line 
to  keep  it  from  being  confounded  with  me;  men  is  writ- 
ten above,  to  keep  it  clear  of  man,  on  the  line. 


' 1 1 11 1 ii ill 9, 


'fv^^>mr<mm 


I 


#- 


mmm 


m  '4 


----- »t «« i«iiiim 

lNUAL    of    PIIONOOBAI'HV. 


58 


Readinq  £xercise  XI* 

•     \       I         o       I        •        I  ••       o      y—        > 

V—.  .1  It        X  ^ 

rv/x    V    O    \    /I'    V,    /I    X      "      ^ 


N  /O^    o     /O^ 


.../  ^. 


MPWW^V* 


^•^•••••■•••••••^•••'^^'••"^^^^•^'^^ 


in 
ct 

(^ 
oi 

wl 
fo 

en 
ar 
to 
bo 
no 


HM*«Mq!li 


•**^*^**A***i*iA**^M 


"^^^^^^^^^^^^^A^AAAAAifcArfc^aAA 


EXERCISE    AND    REVIEW. 


59 


Writing  Exercise  XI. 

*  Ijk  'no'  'kiDdom'  'az'  i  'dcD'  a  republik.  VDm'  da  'tink' 
da  'wil'  'kum'  'up'  'tu-de'  mqrk.  Q  te/ij)  'oV  o  'Jud'  HI  di  sol 
'in'  dis  holi  hss.  Aaijeriti  Icozez  'de'  qef  'ov'  'its'  dezinz 
'Hiz-  lazines  'iz'  eksesiv;  'he'  disljks  'hiz'  buks.  'Hiz'  fans! 
iz  'yilSUali'  riq.  'and'  'hiz'  dezjnz  fu^  'oV  Ijf.  S'Haz'  dis  jui 
'no'  jiwtis.  Oneati  'iz'  »jt  polisi.  'Gl'  eskap  'tu-de'  siti 
'iz'  hoples. 

•J'Xud'  -de'  nam  'be'  put  'on-de'  wtsid  'and'  'on-de'  top- 
•ov-de'  boks.  1'H«'  moni  'qr'  'tu'  go.  'It'  'iz'  't<»'  mug  'tu' 
divjd  amuj)  'dem'.  Zisn  'tu-de'  leson,  'and'  'be'  bizi  'az'  a 
W  'Jud'  'be'  'hffl'  aspjiz  'tu'  'be'  at  'de'  hed  'ov-de'  skml 
Sinser  soro  'iz'  ezili  sen  besjd  tela.  So/al  lif  'givz'  niuo 
hapines.  ' 

Qsk  'no'  fasiliti  'in'  biznes  af^rz,  un?es  'it'  'be'  nesesari. 
Sunset  seiien  Joz  rig  kulorz  'and'  handsum  /adz;  'and'  'it' 
qanjez  intu  meni  varid  formz.  .fli«3ez  'ir'  set  bi  sum,  'az'  'de' 
qet  hapines  'in'  dis  Ijf,  bekez  reali  nesesari,  'az'  da  supoz. 


Review.— (37.)  What  are  the  genond  forma  for  «  and  tf  (38  1  Where 
may  the  circle  be  written  7  (39.}  On  which  side  of  the  vertical  and  in- 
clined strokes  is  It  turned?    Which  side  of  the  straight  hori.ontals  T 

/y.>\  ,/"'"' "^ '"'.''*' *"'"^°'' ^  ^"^  "  ■'  written  between  two  strokes  7 
(40. )  How  are  strokes  having  an  «-oirclo  vocalized?  If  there  bo  an  initial 
circle  and  preceding  vowel,  what  is  the  order  of  reading  ?  If  vowels  both 
precede  and  follow,  what  is  the  order?  (41.)  How  many  oases  are  there 
where  the  stroke  «  must  be  used  7  What  is  the  first?  second?  third?  and 
fourth  I  ( 42. )  How  should  the  «»  in  the  s.ime  syllable  bo  written  ?  How 
"'  (43.)  What  syllables  does  the  double  circle  represent?  What  is  the 
exception?  (44.)  What  are  the  sign-words  for  the  circle?  f  45  1  What 
are  the  prefixes?  (48.)  What  is  the  affix?  When  is  it  more  convenient 
to  write  the  alphabetic  nyf  (47.)  What  is  the  signification  of  m  made 
heavy  7  ( 48. )  Give  the  words  for  the  first  eight  consonant  sizns  •  for  the 
next  eight;  for  the  next  seven.  (49.)  What  is  the  rule  for  writinn  words  " 
whose  only  consonant  is  a  horizontal  one?  (50.)  What  are  the  three 
exoeptions? 


«^^^^p<»«^ 


^^••^PWW* 


i 


It^ 


i\ 


« 


r 


*A^A**»>******^< 


^Hl«*tf>***«i< 


iNBon  5. 


IMPROPER  DIPHTHONGS-  TT-HOOK  -  TRIPHTHONGS. 

51.  The  improper  diphthongs  are  so  termed  because 
they  consist  of  the  union  of  consonants  with  vowelfl  ; 
namely,  w  and  y  with  each  of  the  twelve  vowels  ; — the 
improp«r  triphthongs  are  the  union  of  w  with  the  diph- 
thongs i,  <r,  and  s.  The  fact  that  w  and  y  never  occur 
in  English  except  before  vowels,  and  thus  occur  so 
frequently,  induced  the  inventor  of  Phonography  to 
represent  each  of  the  combined  sounds  by  a  single 
letter,  and  thus  save  time  and  space  for  the  writer. 


IP-SERIES. 


TUB  DOT  OBODP. 

loDg.  short. 

*|  we  '   wi 


«|  wa 


we 


wa 


THE  DASH  GBOVP. 

long.  abort, 

w©  wo 


*i  wo 

J   WO) 


wu 
wu 


52.  To  obtain  suitable  characters  for  the  representa- 
tion of  the  «j-series,  a  small  circle  is  divided  perpendicu- 
larly, thus  'i',  the  first  or  left-hand  half  of  the  circle 
representing  the  union  of  w  with  the  first,  or  dot  series 
of  vowels ;  and  like  them  it  is  made  heavy  for  the  long 
sounds;  as  '\  weep,  *■/  wage,  _  ^  quam;  and  light 
for  the  short;  as  X  witch,  \/^  dwell,  <  wag. 


C60) 


^ 


J 


Wt 

wet,  \ 

We 
wo/in, 

We 


i^^Mt****^!*^^*^ 


0. 


JK  — TRIPHTHONGS. 

are  so  termed  because 
sonants  with  voweln  ; 
1  twelve  vowels  ; — the 
n  of  to  with  the  diph- 
it  w  and  y  never  occur 
,  and  thus  occur  so 
f  of  Phonography  to 
sounds  by  a  single 
pace  for  the  writer. 


THE  DASH  GHOUr. 

oDg.  abort. 


I  wo 
>|  wu 
J  wu 


I  we 

>i  wo 

ers  for  the  representa- 
is  divided  perpendiou- 
and  half  of  the  circle 
the  first,  or  dot  series 
de  heavy  for  the  long 
^  qrwum;  and  light 
\votU^  <  wag. 


IMPROPER    DIPHTIIONas. 


watch,     V~ s-uom,   ,|  xcrndd.  '         ■''  "^ 

55.     These  signs  should  be  written  as  small  as  th«v 
well  can  be  and  preserve  distinct  semi-circ  ^  and  lit- 
the  proper  diphthong-    they  must  «ll!     k        '•      *    l 
vertically,  and  not  chfnge  wUh  The  diff      ^f  •     ,■''"**'"    ' 
of  the  consonants  ^'^'''"*  inclinations 


Rkadinq  Exibcisb  XII. 

'\^  -.  r  r  ^n  Y\.^ 


Writing  Exeboisb  XIII. 


woKkUrd^wTmp  "^™"'  '^-'°'  '^worumj^wo,.  wud. 
Werlik,  worfiir,  werti,  wekij)8tik. 


RSffltVMI 


SJHHWBWSWiiinMiiui 


1, 11 


(  I 


■(  ' 


■M 


62 


MANUAL  Olf  PHO!loa«APIIV. 


56     THE   HMIOOK.— The  half  circle,  light,  is  joined  to 
the  first  en.l  of  /,  up-stroke  r,  m,  and  n,  to  represent  the 
«i„.plo  sound  of  ^o;  the  stroke  to  which  it  is  wr.tten^^ 
then  vocalized  as  in, the  case  ot  the  .-circle;  thus,  <; 
wall,  Y  ^oorry,     <r<-?-    womanly,  ^  v^anc. 

67  The  alphabetic  sif,'"  must  always  bo  employed 
when  w  is  the  only  consonant  in  a  word,  (except  in  the 
word-sign  '  we;)  and  in  words  that  commence  with  a 
vowel,  followed  by  ,«;  and  also  when  w  is  followed  by  »; 
thus,  ^'tooe,  ^1_  iiwake,    \     We»le!,. 

Beading  Exeecise  XIII. 

.r  ^  y 
.^  a  M  "1- 


WRiTiNa  Exercise  XIV. 

Walin  wel  wilinli.  Wilson,  kwel.  ekwali;-Woles  wuli; 
-wer^bew?;.  -I^h^s.  werisumj-kworet,  wurk,  wurkman- 
Jip,  wurjip,  wurtles,  wurtili. 

^^ompum  wumaniik,  8kwemiJnes;-windo,  kwenq,  twenti, 
twiro!  cr5n.  Wir.  k'weri,  inkwir,  wel-be.D.  Bkwolor,  elc 
kwens,  ekwanimiti. 

Wa>,  aw^T,  wizli. 


*»W<P*W**^>^ 


F*******""^"'"''^ 


»W*»»»^^>^^"*' 


^ 


IRAPIIV. 


rclc,  light,  is  joined  to 
nJ  n,  to  reprpwent  tho 
which  it  18  written  is 
tho  »-circle ;  thus,  *(^ 
'i/,  'iJ^  wane. 
i  always  bo  employed 
I  word,  (except  in  the 
that  commence  with  a 
lien  It)  is  followed  by  «; 
Weileif, 


E  XIII. 


9      -i 


'4:(\j-^v. 


18E  XIV. 

3l,   ekwali;— 'Wolea,  wuli; 
-kworet,  wurk,  wurkman- 

Bs;— windo,  kwenq,  twenti, 
[r,  wel-bcifl,  skwolor,   elo- 


TRrPIITIKt.VUS. 


63 


68. 


xnii'iiTirovos. 
The  characters  with  which  to  represent  tho  com- 


b  naton    of  .with   the   diphthongs,  L   obtaincdTy 
^.v  d.ng  a  Hmali  s.,u„re  thus,  >i^  ;  the  loft-hand  right 
ang  e,  ,n  the  first  position,  representing  the   t.iphthonir 
-,  the  other  in  the  firstpo.ition,  ../,  t„d  in  ,he    h  rd 

orL  ;  V  '"^^'  "^  '  ^'""■'-  ^^'"^  ^'-  '"'-duet  on 
of  the  «,.hook  to  r,  I,  m,  n,  the  u-orv  character  is  not 
needed  ,n  writing  English.  Sometimes  ^  may  be  con- 
nected with  the  following  consonant;  as  )  ,oiJc,  \_  u>i/e 

diphthongs  and  triphthongs,  we  get  tho  proper  reprosen 

ir  °  .;''\«r^*---''«  -  such  lords  ar:;::, 

«%,  wh.k,  the  «,  coming  before  tho  h  in  the  old 
orthography  being  an  inversion  of  tho  order  of  the 
elements  m  speaking  tho  words;)  thus,  •*!  toheat  '^ 
whig.  '  ' 

60.     When  the  «;-hook  is  used,  tho  aspirate  is  indi- 
cated   by   making   the   hook    heavy;    thns,    .^^   ,,,,,,, 
o/ V  fer.f,.re.     But  when   the  alphabetic  w  is  om- 
loyod   the  as,    ate  is  indicated  by  a  small  tick,  thus 
\  whiz.  '         > 

Reading  Exercise  XIV. 


^••^•i*****^''^^^'' 


pamin 


LJIUIJUIJ-.    ,..i.JM!l.!i 


[    64 


MANUAL    or    PIIONOORAI'IIY. 


Wbitino  Kxkkcisk  XV. 
Wivz,  kwiet,  widnoH,  kwietne«.  kwat,  Irikwcf. 


em 
hvvulm 


W  WOUD-fllONS. 

e 


wo 


were 


with 


what 


y 


would 

r 


■why--"wh;ie when"""'^e""«hcro        well 

61.     Tbe«e  word-Bign«,  like  the  "^Pl^^.^'tufon; 
are  to  be  written  above  or  on  the  line,  as  theu  posU.OD. 

in  the  table  indicate. 

BlADINQ    EXERCISl   XV. 


-^  ', 


/■ 


^ 


(T 


wi 
'H 

'hv 

'W 

kqi 


■IMIIPIIIMHVaMia 


i 


KXf;miHE    ON    IMPROI'KH    DIPIITHON(J8. 


'!^^^^^**********^k^i*Mrf 


65 


.^  "^.ur.  •  (  r  i^-  I 
r  ."  •  ^  \^-  <^:''--^ 

Writinq  Exercisi  XVI. 

Bewqr  ov-^c'  win  kiip.  Q  wiz  am.  'We'  'wud'  'be'  hnpi 
wifl>  'hiz'  kiimpani.  'Hwi'  'Juil'  'we'  kil  'and'  et  gwin? 
'Hwot'  'iz'  'hiz'  wij,  'and'  'hw^r'  'wud'  'he'  go?  'Hwi'  a  I 
'hwi',  'mi'  sol,  dis  aflgwij.  * 

*  go  awa  'hw^r'  aDzjeti  'and'  wo  'do)'  'not*  asal  oni  'wun' 
'Wud'  i  'w^r'  Bt  hom.  Wor  wurks  raizeri,  'hwil'  pes  'jrivz' 
kqm  repoz  'tu'  'ol'.  *^      " 


f 


^'  "  H  * >»■  I  I  >>p^ 


-^nnsKr.  vgtSBBQBB 


J 


uii,uiu  ,.  luiiji.. 


I  i 


66 


1 U_I_L!  f     •  ' ' '  1 ' 

MANUAL   OF   PHONOGRAPHY. 


7-SERIES. 


TRK  SOT  ttRODP. 

short. 

»4  ya         ^  ye 

„|  yq  J  ya 


long. 

!  ye 


THK  UA8H  OBOOP. 

sbort. 

1  y« 

a|  yu 


long. 


ye 

nl  y<» 


62.  To  obtain  characters  to  represent  the  y-series  of 
improper  diphthongs,  the  small  circle  is  taken  and 
divided  horizontally,  thus, -f  ;  the  under  half  repre- 
sents the  dot  group  of  vowels,  and  is  made  heavy  for  the 
long  sounds;  as, ''"  ^  year,  ^  Yale,  J_  Yazoo;  and  light 
for  tr.e  short;  as,")  yis,  (a  common  but  not  approved 
pronunciation  of  yes,)  '/"  yell,  .-v  yam;  the  upper 
half  represents  the  union  of  y  with  the  dash  group  of 
vowels,  heavy  and  light;  as,  y'  yawl,  _si-yoke,  „)  use; 
■~— '  yon,    vtt^  young;  y  never  occurs  before  u,  in  the 

English  language. 

63.  In  writing,  the  same  rules  must  be  observed  in 
regard  to  these  signs  as  with  the  lo-series.     (§52.) 


64.     WOED-SIGNS. — .. 


ye,       yet,     beyond, 


you. 


r 


'■I  I 


Reading  Exercise  XVI. 


)QBAPHY. 


THK  UA8H  OBOOP. 

short. 

1  yo 

rj  ya>  «|  yu 


long. 

ye 


jpresent  the  y-series  of 
H   circle   is   taken    and 

the  under  half  repre- 
d  is  made  heavy  for  the 
i?e,  J_  Yazoo;  and  light 
mon  but  not  approved 
J  ,„y  yam;  the  upper 
with  the  dash  group  of 

yawl,  _e_  yoke,  „)  ««e; 
ccurs  before  w,  in  the 

33  must  be  observed  in 
!  M-seriea.     (§52.) 


,     beyond,        you. 
[SB   XVI. 


k*AA**AikAah*AA 


EXEKCISKS  ON   IMPROPER   DIPHTHONGS.  67 


Writinq  Exercise  XVII. 

and  folo 'it>  kontmyxiah.     Piii     itnplisiti  'givz'  me  i»      Eia 
Reading  Exercise  XVII 


1 





imjaJwiijiwBaer.'sT 


-■^j..iji>iiai^ir.  .'.iim..,. 


M 


I ' > « *J_?JL1-*  *- '  ■'''"**" 


68 


MANUAL   OF   PHONOaRAPHY. 


Writing  Exercise  XYIII. 

Nil  York  'iz'  a  popyu'ua  siti.  'Ya>'  'no'  'ha>'  i  am  'yet'  J 
am  at  a  los  'tu'  spek  'voir'  nam.  Hiimaniti  'Jud'  liv  'in'  pef, 
'az'  'wun'  komiiniti;  da  'Jud'  dwol  'tui^jeder'  'in'  'el-de'  e(t 
'in'  hqrmoni  and  luv.  If  'y<i)'  mak  fulynrz  'in'  diiti,  'ya>' 
'wil'  resev  'de'  laj  'ov'  justis.  '«Ie'  niiz-btr  amiizez  himself 
'hwjl'  wekip.  Ho  ves!  ho  ves!  sez  'de'  yu^  bel-ri{)er.  'cte' 
yok  'ov-de'  oks  'iz'  hevi;  'it'  golz  'hiz'  nek  dis  werm  da.  'In' 
daz  'ov'  yor,  'hwen'  'we'  'w?r'  yuj). 

'We'  'ynsnali'  'giv'  'dem'  at  srz  'ter'  slepip,  ten  'for'  wurk, 
'and'  siks  'hwicj'  da  'ma'  'imprtoV  'in'  eni  'wa'.  Je'  berz  j  am 
tegij)  'qr'  dezirus  'ov'  'imprcKvnient';  da  sem  'tu'  'ti^k'  'm'  dis 
'wa'"— 'hwot'  'iz'  wurt  dottio  at  'ol'  'iz'  wurt  dcnio  'wel'.  *  hop 
da  'wil'  olwfiz  liv  'up'  'tu'  dis  maksim,  'so'  'Jal'  da  'hav'  suk- 
sea  'in'  lif.  Sun,  'giv'  'mc'  'voor'  er,  'and'  i  'wil'  teq  'yo)'  'de' 
'wa'  'oV  Ijf.  Leoti  'oV  daz  'iz'  'givn'  us  'for'  sojal  'and'  re- 
lijus  'imprtKvment'. 

Bbvibw.— (51.)  Explain  the  improper  diphthongs,  the  tripht'iongs. 
(  52. )  How  are  those  ot  the  UJ-sories  represented?  W  hich  scries  of  vowels, 
combined  with  w,  does  the  left-hand  half  of  the  circle  represent?  (63.) 
What  are  the  sounds  of  the  right-hand  half  of  the  circle?  (a4. )  To  what 
consonants  may  the  signs  for  waw  and  wo  be  written  without  lifting  the 
pen?  (55.)  How  should  these  signs  be  written?  (5*5.)  lo  what  strokes 
does  the  w  semi-cirele  connect  and  form  a  hooli?  On  which  side  of  the 
up-stroke  r  is  it  written?  How  does  it  differ  in  power  from  the  improper 
diphthongs?  (57.)  When  must  the  ftlphabetic  w  be  employed?  (58.) 
Describe  the  representation  of  the  triphthongs.  (59.)  What  is  the  pho- 
nographic representation  ot  whf  (60.)  How  is  the  w-hook  aspirated? 
(61.)  Designate  the  first  lino  of  word--.igus;  the  second. 

(62  )  What  are  the  signs  to  represent  the  w-series?  Which  half  ot  the 
oirele  represents  the  dot  series?  What  are  their  sounds?  What  are  the 
sounds  of  the  upper  half?  (63.)  How  are  they  to  be  written  to  the  con- 
sonants?   (64.)  What  ate  the  word-signs? 


,,.. Ill     '~  ■ ' " 


so  II 


lAPIIY. 

XYIII. 

D'  'no'  'hflo'  i  am  'yet'  j 
aaniti  'Jutl'  liv  'in'  pef, 
tui^eder'  'in'  'el-de'  eit 
fulynrz  'in'  diiti,  'vffj' 
iiiz-btr  amiizez  himself 
de'  yup  bel-riper.  'cte' 
nek  dib  werm  da.     'In' 


r'  slepip,  ten  'fer'  wurk, 
3ni  'wa'.  Je'  Ixrz  j  am 
1  sem  'tu'  'tick'  'in'  dis 
vurt  dfflio  'wel'.     *  hop 

'so'  'Jal'  da  'hav'  Buk- 
and'  I  'wil'  teq  'ya>'  'de' 

us  'for'  sojal  'and'  re- 


iphthongs,  tho  tripht!iong9. 
ed?  Which  scries  of  vowels, 
tho  circle  represent?  (83.) 
t  the  circle?  (54.)  To  what 
written  without  lifting  the 
;en?  (5*5.)  To  what  strokes 
Qok?  Un  which  side  of  the 
in  power  from  the  improper 
etic  to  be  employed?  (58.) 
[3.  (59.)  What  is  tho  pho- 
w  is  the  w-hook  aspirated? 
the  second. 

w-serics?  Which  half  of  the 
heir  sounds?  What  are  the 
ojr  to  be  written  to  the  con- 


^^^^^**ifc^AA<^^>^A^^<^M^^^ 


XtBBzn  6. 

LVITUL  HOdKS-THE  Z-HOOK  EXPLAINED. 

65.     A  peculiar  characteristic  of  I  and  r  is,  that  they 
readily  unite  with  preceding  con.sonants— they  flow  back 
into  them,  as  it  were ;  and  hence  their  classification  as 
liquids.     This  union,  though  a  kind  of  double  sound,  is 
formed  by  little  more  than  a  single  effort  of  the  voice. 
Take,  for  illustration,  the  two  words  phn/  and  prai,,  and 
observe  how  simultaneously  the  j,/  and  pr  are  spoken; 
so  in  the  termination  of  the  words  title  and  acre;  in  the 
former  class  of  words  no  vowel  sound  comes  between  the 
two  consonants,  of  course;  in  the  latter  a  very  indistinct 
one  IS  heard,  but  which  it  is  not  necessary  to  represent 
in  Phonography. 

66.  The  most  philosophical  and  brief  way  of  repre- 
senting these  combinations  is  undoubtedly  by  some  dis- 
Hnct  and  uniform  modification  of  the  simple  letters. 
The  modification  adopted  for  the  I  is  that  of  a  hook 
written  thus: 

\  P.  \  rh       j  t,  [  ti;      ^/,^/i,  etc. 

67.  As  the  long  consonants  are  heard  first  in  the 
words,  consistency  would  seem  to  require  that  they  be 
written  first  and  the  hooks  afterward;  but  the  reverse  of 
this  is  the  case,  for  the  reason  that  hooks  on  the  termi- 
nation of  strokes  may  be  more  philosophically  and 
advantageously  employed  for  other  purposes;  and  be- 


'^uamMi^:ssjsaitss?i 


11 


I      !| 


M 


'M 


■  1 


I ^ 


MANUAL   OF   PHONOGRAPHT. 


I«     8 


sides,  pi,  tl,  kl,  fl,  &c.,  being  considered  single  sounds 
almost,  the  stroke  and  the  hook  must  be  regarded  as  an 
indivisible  sign;  they  should  a'^tually  be  spoken  as  such 
8  Mng  and  reading,  i.  e.,  as  the  final  syllables  in 
.oh  pi),  VMle  (tl),  muf/e  (fl),  &ckle  (kl);  and  not  as 
P,l;  t,  I;  /,  ^-  *=.  '•  ^  distinction  is  thus  made  between 
p,  i  pronounced  as  two  letters,  and  pi  pronounced  as 
one  ;  the  former  suggests  \^,  and  the  latter  \  . 

68.  To  assist  the  pupil  in  remembering  these  hooks, 
it  may  be  observed,  that  if  the  /eft  Land  be  held  up, 
with  the  first  finger  bent,  the  outline  of  tl  will  be  seen; 
and  by  turning  the  hand  round  in  the  various  positions 
assumed  by  the  letters,  i>,  t,  ch,  k,  all  the  double  conso- 
nants of  the  pi  series  will  be  formed;  thus, 


kid 


TABLE  OF  THE  i-HOOK. 


\P1 
\bl 

Vvl 


ftl 

fdl 

fthl 
( thl 


y  chi 


kl 


;  shi ) 

•=-^  V  struck  up. 

.>  zhl  I 


69  The  hook  is  first  turned,  and  then  the  long  con- 
sonant struck  in  the  usual  manner.  The  /-hook,  like 
the  »-circle,  is  made  on  the  right-hand  ^de  of  the  verti- 
cal and  inclined  straight  strokes,  on  the  upper  side  of 
the  straight  horizontals,  and  on  the  inside  of  the  curves. 


m«<p*w«'«w***«' 


>»»»HHH I 


wit 
inii 

as  -I 

are 
the 

7 
sign 
wril 
beft 
lowi 
or  { 

7; 

to  UJ 

'     StOOi 

ever 

Tl 
used 
consi 

the  8 


'^fffmssoKSfm 


«Miij|wai|iwwjBiff'»WW*i'>'''!'Tii  wiiumTiioi — 


APHY. 


dered  single  sounds 
st  be  regarded  as  an 
ly  be  spoken  as  such 
he  final  syllables  in 
ikk{kl);  and  not  as 
is  tbus  made  between 
nd  pi  pronounced  as 
a  the  latter  \  • 
Qiberlng  these  hooks, 
.ft  hand  be  held  up, 
ne  of  tl  will  be  seen; 
the  various  positions 
all  the  doable  conso- 
jd;  thus, 

a 


r\ 

chl 

\L 

/" 

-HOOK. 

chl 

^-U 

jl 

c-gl 

shl-k 
zbl) 

struck  up. 

and  then  the  long  con- 
nner.     The  J-hook,  like 
Ihand  ude  of  the  verti- 
l    on  the  upper  side  of 
Vhe  inside  of  the  curves. 


h*A«AjMk***AA*ikil^^^*^^M^d 


THE     i&-HOOK. 


71 


70.  This  hook  to  the  strokes  «,  «,  down -stroke  r,  and 
n^r,  is  not  needed,  since  for  <Z  and  z/,  the  circle  is  used 
with  more  advantage;  as,  ^  ulai/,  ^71^  muscle;  and  the 
initial  hook  to  I,  up-stroke  r,  m,  and  n,  is  more  useful 
as  w.    (§56) 

71.  The  sh  and  zh  take  the  ?-hook  only  when  they 
are  combined  with  other  stroke  consonants,  and  then 
they  are  ttruck  upward;  thus,  )_^  aisential, 

72.  The  stroke  and  the  hook  being  considered  aS  one 
sign,  are  vocalized  as  though  no  hook  were  used;  and  in 
writing,  if  a  vowel  precedes  a  hooked  stroke  it  is  written 
before  it;  thus,  N^  able,  \_  evil;  and  if  the  vowel  fol- 
lows, it  must  be  placed  after;  thus,  \  jp'i^,  =— «>  dose; 
or  a  vowel  may  be  written  both  before  and  after;  thus 
?s^    iihlif,  "p    idlrr,    J  declare,  .^4!__y~^  exclaim. 


73.  In  some  combinations  of  consonants  it  is  difficult 
to  make  a  good  ^hook,  but  it  can  generally  be  under- 
stood, as  in  the  word  /;  \  r<ply;  in  some  cases,  how- 
ever, it  is  more  convenient  to  write  the  long  I;  as  \a 
— '-^^/^  a-ccessiblc. 

The  learner  must  remember  that  the  hook  Ms  to  be 
uaed  only  when  its  sound  follows  a  preceding  stroke 
consonant ;  hence  Ip,  Id,  Ik,  &c.,  must  be  written  with 
the  stroke  I. 

Beadinq  Exsboiss  XVIII. 


\ 


,.    ,/•  \y  '\y 


p*^pW^^^^^^^^^^?55^SSP5i>5««^^59?SS^^^iwi*»5(«rr»"»»» 


1 


WSSSiS 


72 


MANUAL   OF    PHONOORAPHY. 

Writing  Exercise  XIX. 


Ltal,  radikal,  klerikal,  bujel,  ospejal,  :«,,.|ra,  i.-ueu,   ., 

i 

74     It,  haa   beon    '4ated,    (|<i.>)  that  the   l-hook  is   | 
desi^aed  to  be  used  ^hen  no  vowel  comes  between  the 
sound   of  I  and  a  precodin;^    oonpnnant,  or  wh«i   t  .e    , 
vowd  is  hue  indistinctly  heard;   as,  V    M  c-  n^.V- 
S.«»p?08,^m^/«<.;  but  if  h  tound  very  c-o-  ■vnieut 
occasion.Uv,  to  take  a  little  Hcen.o  with    »he   lu..,  and 
use  fne  hook  even  where  a  vowel  soana  is  distinctly 
aenrd  between  it  and  the  stroke.     Thus,  in  writing  the 
,v<.rd  fuhehood,  it  is  much  easiey^and  quicker  to  write 
tl  e  hook/,  thus,  ^f.    than  thus,  V^^J 

75      When  thit  is  done,  a  peculiar  scheme  of  vocali- 
zation is  resorted  to;  namely,  tbu  dot  vowels  are  indi- 
cated by  a  small  circle  placed  in  the  three  positions, 
before  the  stroke  for  the  long,  and  after  for  the  short 
vowels;  as°L  dclusioe,  ^  till,  C^  ^rgal;  when  the  dash 
vowels  are  to  be  read  between  the  stroke  and  the  hook, 
it  is  indicated  by  striking  the  dash  through  the  stroke ; 
as  ^A  cnlpabk;  or  when  its  place  is  at  the  hooked  end 
it  may  Sfe  written  just  before  the  hooked  stroke,  thus, 
fx^   tolerable;   the    diphthongs,   when    necessary,   are 
written  as  the  stroke  vowels;  thus  y  childUh,    (See 
§100)  '"^   qualify. 

This   method   of  writing  is  used  to  a  very  limited 
extent ;  and  the  learner  is  cautioned  against  using  it  for 
any  words  but  such  as  are  designated,  in  this  and  subse- 
quent lessons,  to  be  written  thus 
I,' » ^ 


HDg^^c^ 


(mmmmsi^^ 


"'■UMIU 


flRAPHV. 

B    XIX. 

:klavn,   iiifiom,    renicoval, 

!;.H00\ 

5)  that  the  Z-hook  is 
yel  comes  between  the 
nponant,  or  wIxmi  t'e 
as,  *^C  /««.  «:—  '''''■'.v.- 
t'ouad  very  <;o-  '.^nieul, 
ISO  with  the  iu!d,  and 
vet  sound  ia  distinctly 
Thus,  in  writing  the 
V  and  quicker  to  write 


''yJi 


;ruUar  scheme  of  vocali- 
»i'  dot  vowels  are  indi- 
ia  the  three  positions, 
ind  after  for  the  short 
=-T  Irgal;  when  the  dash 
he  stroke  and  the  hook, 
ash  through  the  stroke ; 
lace  is  at  the  hooked  end 
he  hooked  stroke,  thus, 
8,  when  necessary,  are 
,hu8     ./'"childish,    (See 

used  to  a  very  limited 
ioned  against  using  it  for 
;nated,  in  this  and  subse- 
ts. 


jjjjlj^iii>**it<i^A<i^<i 


/.-HOOK   AND   THE   CIRCLE. 


73 


Reading  Exebcise  XIX. 

V  V  '^"-  "sf.  v^_,,  „.A.  ~T^.;^-. 

Writing  Exercise  XX. 

£-HOOK  PRECEDED  BY  THE  5-CIRCLE. 

76.  The  .-circle  is  prefixed  to  the  compound  conso- 
nant signs,  as  well  as  to  the  simple.  It  is  first  written, 
and  the  pen  carried  round  so  as  to  form  the  hook  before 
making  the  long  sign;  thus,  ^  supple,  ./"  sacM,  r, 
civilize.  ^^ 

77.  No  new  rules  are  required  for  vocalizing;  it 
needs  only  to  be  borne  in  mind  when  the  long  s  is  to  be 
used  (§41);  and  that  the  stroke  and  hook  are  considered 
«s  one  sign,  and  if  the  vowel  is  heard  before  them  it  is 
written  before  them;  if  after,  it  is  written  afterward;  as 
in  the  previous  examples. 

78.  In  reading,  the  circle  is  read  first,  then  the 
vowel,  if  one  precedes  the  compound  stroke;  and  lastly 
the  compound  con.sonant,  with  its  following  vowel,  if 
there  be  one,  as  in  civilize  above. 

79.  Word-signs. — 
I  till  and  tell,  ^  value. 


call,  ^_  dificult-y,  ^  full, 


;  ,    i 


:•!!    i^ 


•!»  i 


111 *' 


I iimt««ttiiin 


74 


MANUAL    OP   PIIONOQBAIMIV 


Beadinq  Exercise  XX. 

/•1,.v\VC^^\,V.|-"— • 


\  .  ?  '  V  '  \.  I  '  *o«^  ^  ^- 


Sot 
splisij 
diaklu 

NOTI 

ten  wit 

*D] 

apl'iz  I 
ap/uz  ' 
'for'  'I 
'for'  SI 
eti.  '] 
|l   'and'  'f 

j   'iz'dia; 
pepl. 
wurs,  '( 

!   'duo'." 
'wil'  ol 
'him'. 

Revie 
What  ii 
with  I  at 
sition  of 
straight  i 
zontalii? 
Muiok  IK 
(72.)  He 
Vowel  801 
viiwelaof 
How  the 
bo  writtoi 
Buoh  oomi 


HM 


A^^^ihAAA*AA***^**^^A*Ag 


HAXMIY 


!   XX. 


f.     o 


S-^^ 


r  X  . 


> » I  ■  1 1 » » » ■ ' ' ' ' '' 


.*^; 


'■^lllV-- •  -  -  I  I  I 


**^^****A« 


EXERCISE    ON    THE    /.HOOK,    AND    REVIEW.  75 


Wkitino  Exercise  XXI. 

Sotl,    gjdl,    sutlti,    siviliti,   siklz,  siinlnes    aivHiVl^        i 

ap?iz  himself  k^osH  'tu'  'hiz'  buks'hp'  I,n,      I    fl"^  ""^^^  ''''^' 
'fer'  sumiin  vusfu/  'in'  him  't,..'  ,.«„  ,/»„„,  tcL?  fi*   '^^   '"^k 


<•     J.    T   .         "H"  laoiud,  -no'  b/esn  awata 


straigat  atrokos  is  the  l-iaok  written?  Whinh  »i7  7  .T  '  ""?  <neHned 
lontaU?  Which  side  of  the  curves?  f  70  fl-n  -v  ?^  ."it  ''™'eht  hori- 
^hook  uot  written,  and  why?  (U)  AowL  .i^"'.''°i^  the  strokes  is  the 
(72.)  How  are  ^hook  -troL  Vol/ilif^T '^74^"M  h''Li'/  l"'"'?''' 
vowel  sound  between  the  stroke  consonant  and  ihe  hook?  (tT^  S*"""'  * 
!of  the  dot  series  represented  in  thn  «,.h„m«  «■  ,S.^->  "OW  are 

he  dash  series?    H,.„  .1."  *.-..i"u.''A"S''^'^^ forjocaluing  the  hook? 


Vowel 

viiwels 

Ho 


How  the  dash  «eries      Ho'^The  dTphthon^rTrft  rj*"""""*  '^ 

be  written  to  the  hooked  stroke-^  ( VsT^hi^V  tt^T^""'  " 

.ueh  compound  strokes?    (79.)  Wha\  ^ri  the  /-hiok  worf  .^s?  "^'°« 


«-oircle 


mmitim 


iiiift'ii  JW'uftaartliwlii.. 


I >*< 


leisscu  7. 

THE  7?-H00K- DOUBLE  CURVE  FOR   TOR. 

80.     If  the  right  hand  bo  hold   up,  with  tho  first 
finger  bent,  the  outline  of  tr  will  be  seen,  and  by  turn- 
ing  the  hand  round  to  the  following  positions,  all  the  | 
double  oonsonants  of  the  pr  series  will  be  produced. 


I;        '■ 


H   '11 


l>  »   * 


\pr 
Nbr 
■^fr 
'^  vr 


pr 


tr 


chr 


krC 


TABF.E  OF  THE  i?-HOOK. 


Itr 
\  dr 
^  thr 
")  thr 


y  chr  =—  kr 

/  jr  «^  gr 

-^         \  struck  down. 
J  zhr  ) 


mr 


nr 


81.     The  r-hook  is  written  on  the  left-hand  side  of 

the  vertical  and  inclined  straight  strokes,  and  on  the 

under  side  of  the  straight  horizontals— just  the  reverse 
of  the  ^hook. 


I* 

(76) 


F»»W***W»»<»W»''^»"''*' 


>«iWWW*V^i>^^>'*" 


'*~^*'>"<**MM"M'M|B)(<i*r* 


*Ml^^ 


7. 


JUVE  FOB   TOR. 

leld  up,  with  tho  first 
1  be  seen,  and  by  turn- 
awing  positions,  all  tho 
08  will  be  produced. 


chr 


/{-HOOK. 

/  chr  =—  kr 

/jr  c—  gr 

-^         I  struck  down. 
J  zhr ) 

an  the  left-hand  side  of 
jht  strokes,  and  on  the 
sontals — ^just  the  reverse 


k****A**ikik*A*^M 


k*M^Mk*< 


ki**< 


TUB    /MIOOK. 


77 


82.  It  will  be  seen  from  the  table  that/,  i ,  fh,  and  th 
take  the  r-hook  by  asHuming  inverted  positions  and 
occupying  the  places  of  r,  to,  »,  and  z;  thus,  "=%  free,  7\ 
over,  Jj/,ro„uh,  j  etfhrr,  which  they  can  do  without 
ambiguity,  since  these  letters  never  receive  an  initial 
hook.  In  this  there  is  an  apparent  disorder,  but,  when 
properly  viewed,  they  are  in  strict  analogy  with  the 
straight  con.sonant8.  If  the  character  \  pi  be  out  out 
in  a  piece  of  paper  or  .-ard,  and  then  turned  over,  \  pr 
is  produced;  in  the  same  way  ^  /,  if  cut  in  card,  and 
reversed,  gives  "^  fr. 

8;J.  To  indicate  the  r-hook  on  m  and  n,  the  strokes 
are  made  heavy,  which  distinguishes  them  from  wm  mi; 
thus,  i^  honor,  J^  dninn;  ,_rS  grammar;  and  as 
neither  nip  nor  ng  take  any  hook,  it  will  not  lead  to 
any  confusion. 

Sometimes  this  hook,  like  the  ?-hook,  has  to  be  made 
rather   indistinctly,  as  ll_  degree,  \         aicribe.     After 

y  the  downward  r  is  used  instead  of  the  hook,  as 
shaker. 

84.  The  remarks  in  regard  to  vocalizing  tho  Z-hook 
strokes  apply  in  every  particular  to  the  r-hook  strokes. 
It  should  especially  be  borne  in  mind  that  the  hooked 
strokes  are  regarded  as  one  letter,  and  spoken  as  the  last 
syllable  in  rmper,  Ictta-,  acre,  &c.,  and  not  as  p,  r;  t,  r, 
^•,  r,  &c.;  and  that  as  a  general  thing  the  hook  is  only 
used  when  no  distinct  vowel  sound  comes  between  an- 
other consonant  and  a  following  r;  as  in  \  pray,  =-7 
crew,  -1  utter,  f^'J  leisure. 

85.  When  ]  tr  ia  preceded  by  ']  (icaw),  they  may 
be  united ;  as  in   ^   water,  and  all  its  compounds. 


MANirAL  Of  PttOfWOBAMIT. 


Bkadinu  Exercisk  XXI. 

WBiTiNd  Exercise  XXII. 

Dii,  trp,  (Ira,  krj,  j^nn,  akor,  odor,  uiw,  nijrjz,  npril,  aproiv, 
arem  brij,  frek,  Fridu,  mmvcr,  klov.^r,  tiu,  gst'lor,  tm7,\\t, 
Dhimcr  murdor,  inaner,  oiioiabl,  overluk,  ovcriliwiir  knm- 
inal,  purQasez,  transpoz,  trcmbl,  brudor,  jurni,  juriuil,  framer, 
wumiurful.    Gokor,  joker. 

86.  A  limited  liceiiHe  is  taken  with  the  above  rule, 
(^H4)  as  ii'  the  case  of  the  /-hook,  and  the  r-hook  is  some- 
times used  when  a  distinct  vowel  sound  comes  between  it 
and  the  previous  consonant;  in  which  ease  the  same  pecu- 
liar scheme  of  vocalization  is  empbyed ;  thus,  "^  Dear- 
«>.    %_-  P«"«o».  '^+"  "'"'■*^'  y(      require,    V  poiture. 


NT  "U. 


,w 


Keadinu  Exercise  XXII. 

^.  '^  ^^  ^ 


g^» mi^^^^^''*^^^ 


e 

iireli 


8' 
snni 
writ 
nev< 
ad  VI 
mon 

Niin] 

I 

traci 
pies 
writi 

8S 
strai 
the  I 
proitj. 

80 
and  1 
the  • 


n::xT- 


'Xfffifr:i>'W,-vs;:i.'=Kis-Wiim*i" 


E    XXI. 


E   XXII. 

upcr,  npriz,  (Tpril,  aproiv, 

over,  fi(i>,  i?rtrt«r,  i;ru;^Hr, 
iverluk,  nvcriliwur,  krim- 
idor,  jiirni,  juriul,  framer, 


en  with  the  above  rule, 
and  the  r-hook  is  some- 
sound  conies  between  it 
hich  ease  the  same  pecu- 
ployed;  thus,  "X^^  Z>ear- 
require,    V  pothire. 


s^ 


laE  XXII. 


•^•••••••^••'*»^»*^''^^^ 


kMi********^k«>k*dM 


Till!     A-IIOOK. 


79 


WlllTINO    KxERCrHK    XXIII. 

<?erful.  kjirloi,  merli,  nerli,  Garlz,  qnrkol,  paragra/,  fqrk, 
/<ir|)cr.  eorni  perv^rn,  kowli,  moraiiti,  uort,  nurif,  enormitl, 
prelimiiiari,  fetynr.  >         i  j.  , 

THE  ft  irooK  I'HF.CKDED  BY  THE  *CIKCI.B. 
87.  The  ji-circlo  precedes  the  r-hook  in  much  the 
same  manner  as  it  does  the  /-hook;  thus,  it  might  bo 
written  <N,  spr,  rr-  skr;  but  since  the  «-circIe  alone 
never  occupies  the  r-hook  side  of  the  straight  strokes, 
advantage  is  taken  of  the  circumstance,  since  a  circle  is 
more  easily  written  than  a  circle  and  a  hook,  to  write 
Niiiiply  the  circle;  thus,  '|.  »fra^.  cr-^~-  „rm,m,  ^]  r.idn; 
a-!-  »urror,  /  tirger.  JJut  with  the  curves  this  con- 
traction cannot  bo  made,  since  the  simple  n-eirole  occu- 
pies the  place;  hence  the  circle  and  hook  must  both  be 
written;  thus   7^  mfft-r,  #V  «Mwmer,  "^  tinner. 

88.  When  the  «-circle  and  »--hook  come  between  two 
straight  cousonaiits,  it  is  often  more  convenient  to  write 
the  hook  in  addition   to  the  circle  than  not;  as  in  "^V 
pro$ppr,       ^ ,  fxrtra.  \ 

89.  The  same  rules  are  to  be  observed  in  vocalizing 
and  reading  that  were  given  for  the  /-hook  preceded  by 
the  j-circle,  (§77,  §78.)  / 

Rkadtnq  ExEacisj!  XXIII. 


'^^'^"'^'^'f'^f^mi^mii^vmwmrmm^mmm^vmmmm 


r^pw^p«vwvw« 


•■■'■'ir'if~\ii--ffV#iAi'i-:'r-- 


..i.U'J'-i)ii|IIIL 


80 


MANUAL   OF   PHONOGRAPHY. 


Writing  Exercise  XXIV. 

Sprj,  stra,  strik,  atrem,  rkrap,  skrcopl,  skrib,  streB*,  strugl, 
atranj,  stronger,  super,  saber,  siipreinasi,  sekresi,  sifer,  suferip, 
sever,  sinier,  soBnor. 

THE  DOUBLE  CURVE  FOB  TMR. 
90.    When  a  curved  stroke  is  repeated,  an  angle  is 

made  between  the  two ;    thus,  "^^^  /',  v '  nn,  which 

leaves  at  liberty,  to  be  used  for  some  other  purpose,  the 
douhk-length  strokes.  A  somewhat  arbitrary,  though 
convenient  use,  is  made  of  them  thus ;  Doubling  the 
length  of  a  curved  stroke,  adds  nVe  syllable  tUr  to  the 
single  strokes;  thus,  V^.  father,  "^-7-^  another.  These 
forms  are  used  chiefly  as  word-signs  for  father,  mother, 
neither  (above  the  line,)  another,  rather,  further. 


\  prinoiple-al 
N  re-member 


91. — fi-HOOK  WORD-SIGNS- 

"^  from  J^  sure 

"^  every  ^  pleasure 

1    truth  ;   three  f  Mr.,  re-mark 

•^care  )    there,  their  ^™*"'® 

Rkadinq  Exercise  XXIV. 

„.  J' ■•  L  >?  "  ~" -"oA. , 


mrw^09>i^^f^vi^m 


]jg| 


/^ 


\\  =>■ 


y^ 


-::xzz 


*•  <> 


U 


I   I   I  t  ■  fc^AAA^rt  1  »  «  t  I 


3RAPHY. 


XXIV. 

apl,  skrib,  strexjlt,  strugl, 
isi,  sekresi,  sifer,  suferip, 


FOR  THR. 

repeated,  an  angle  ia 

Jf,  v_^s_y  nn,  which 

me  other  purpose,  the 

hat  arbitrary,  though 

thus;  Doubling  the 
Ve  syllable  ther  to  the 

■^^ — ^  another.  These 
;ns  for  fattier,  mother, 
rather,  further. 

J-SIGNS- 

^  sure 
^  pleasure 

f  Mr.,  re-mark 
eir    '^^n^o'^e 

XXIV. 

V    J      .  \^-    X 


.Ac  , 


■wwwvMPWw^^nnw^p^r^ 


'*** * r ^j^^fc^ 

EXERCISE   ON    THE   /i-HOOK.  81 


1x  •  V^-^v^rn  ^.  ti.l  .t^,,> 


FJ"^RFP»i>lW^ 


!L'A'J!!!mJlii" 


^k^^j^t^* 


^^^i^^<Xi^A**JUbi*«>A<>**********'*' 


>A*AiMb*tfi*A*'ii**A' 


82 


MANUAL   OF  PHONOGRAPHY. 


;  It] 


NoTK.— In  the  foUowiniJ  exercise  r  is  italioiied  when  it  is  to  bn  written 
with  the  houk. 

Writing  Exercise  XXV. 

SBRIUSNES  AND  SOBM8TI.— Nubio  nobl  iz  tu  be  had 
but  wid  seriusnes  and  sobrjeti.  (I  sober  person  seks  tu  wa  de 
tro)  'valvH'  ov  tiflz  and  tu  la  no  trestirz  in  trjflz,  but  'raderj 
on  h^vot  iz  'impertant.'  Nutin,  perhaps,  striks  us  az  so  stranj 
and  fu)lif  az  tu  obz^rv  pepl  serius  abst  trjflz,  and  tritlig  wid 
serius  ti^z.  Sosieti  suferz  konsiderabli  bj  de  trjfler,  ha>  hats 
aobricti  and  seriusnes,  and  wud  saner  hav  Eoli  tu  ran  siiprem. 
Suplid  wid  stroz  tu  pk  wid,  he  suferz  de  strem  ov  I'li  tu  flo 
awa,  until  det  puts  in  hiz  sikl,  and  sepaj-ats  de  atnc  ov  Uf. 
N»  'iz  no  tim  fer  sukor  er  eskap.  He  strjks  wid  stregt  and 
unerii)  am;  strips  him  ov  ol  hiz  plez,  strojz  hiz  liops  intu  de 
ar,  and  a  strugl  klozez  hiz  karer. 

It  iz  hot  untro)  and  stranj  tu  konstrcD  seriusnes  intu  sadnes, 
er  tu  konsider  solwieti  de  sam  az  unhapincs;  fer  it  iz  skqrsli 
posibl  tu  be  properli  ga  er  trmli  hapi,  unlea  we  no  hwen  tu 
be  sober. 

Bevibw.— (80.)  How  will  you  remember  the  form  of  the  r-hook?  Pi.) 
On  which  side  of  the  straight  strokes  is  the  r-hook  written?  (82. )  What 
strokes  do  not  toko  the  r-hook?  In  what  wjjy  do/,  v,  th,  <A,  take  the 
r-'iook?  Explain  this  irregularity.  (83.)  How  do  m  and  n.  take  this 
hcwk'  (84)  What  is  said  about  vocalizing?  How  do  you  name  the  strokes 
of  tho  r-hook?  (86.)  What  is  the  license  in  regard  to  the  use  of  the 
r-hook?  Explain  the  peculiar  scheme  of  vocalization.  (87.)  How  is  tho 
,-cirele  prefixed  to  the  straight  r-hook  strokes?  How  to  the  curves?  (90.) 
What  is  effected  by  doubling  the  length  of  curved  strokes?  (91.)  Des- 
ignate the  first  four  word-signs;  the  next  four;  the  last  three. 


U 
fa 
a] 

Ui 
tl 
t\ 

pi 


PWWWWWW*'**^^^'^^ 


•••*•**•••••••••••'••••' 


C( 


~  .  %^^«T  i.t=;s2i;S 


>A*AiMb*tfi*A*'ii**A' 


JRAPHY. 


sized  when  H  is  to  bn  written 

1  XXV. 

■Nubifl  nobl  iz  tvi  be  had 
ler  person  seks  tu  wa  de 
Hrz  in  trjtlz,  but  'rader' 
,ps,  striks  us  az  so  straiij 
5t  trjflz,  and  trjfliB  wid 
bli  bj  (le  trjfler,  hoo  hats 
•  hav  toll  tu  ran  sq,prem. 
z  de  strem  ov  lif  tu  flo 
sepaj-ats  de  atriB  ov  Ijf. 
le  str^ks  wid  stregt  and 
strottz  hiz  liops  intu  de 

ro)  seriusnes  intu  sadnes, 
lapines;  fer  it  iz  skqrsli 
,  unlea  we  no  hwen  tu 


("1.) 
What 


he  form  of  the  r-hook? 
(■-hook  written?  (82.)  What 
fay  do  f,  V,  th,  th,  take  the 
How  do  m  and  n  take  this 
How  do  you  name  the  utrokes 
in  regard  to  the  use  of  the 
jalization.  (87.)  How  is  the 
Bs7  How  to  the  curves?  (90.) 
curved  strokes?  (91.)  Des- 
ur;  the  last  three. 


*»»*•••*•••••••»•••''•' 


hA*^AA^^<fc^AA  a  ■  a  »  i  t^^^f^^^^^^^^,^,^,^^  *  i  A  a  ^^^afcrth^fc^^.^^ 


lE03on  8 


TERMINAL  HOOKS. 

92.  Since  the  hooked  strokes,  although  representing 
two  elementary  sounds,  are  written  with  nearly  the  same 
facility  as  the  simple  strokes,  the  method  of  hooking  is 
applied  to  the  termination  of  the  consonant  signs  as  well 
£.s  to  the  beginning.  The  most  useful  purposes  which 
the  two  terminal  hooks  can  subserve,  are  to  represent 
the  very  frequent  sound  of  n,  and  the  common  final 
syllable  tion,  heard  in  such  words  as  nation,  passion, 
physician,  &c. 


TABLE   OF 

THE  A-HOOK. 

\pn 

J  tn 

^  chn 

kn 

\bn 

,   dn 

</jn 

—^gn 

^fn 
Vo  vn 

(thn 
(thn 

J  sn 
J  zn 

(  Jshn 
^l^zhn 

■^rn^ 


mn 


nn 


N)  wn  ^  yn 

93.  On  the  straight  strokes  the  n-hook  is  written  on. 
the  left-hand  side  of  the  vertical  and  inclined,  and  ;v; 
the  under  side  of  the  horizontal  strokes,  embracing,  of 
coarse,   the   up-stroke   r ;    while   on   the   curves   it  is 

"  " ' ' "  '(iiS)  '"^ 


J 


11 


84 


MANUAL   OP    PHONOQRAPHY. 


written  on  the  inner  or  concave  side,  whether  to  the  left 
or  right;  as  illu.stratcd  in  the  preceding  table. 

94.  The  ?i-hook  might  be  written  on  all  the  strokes; 
but  on  the  ng  it  would  seldom,  if  ever,  be  of  any  advan- 
tage. The  It-hook  to  the  n  answers  every  purpose  that 
an  n-hook  to  the  w  would. 

95.  Of  the  two  forms  for  In,  shn,  the  down-stroke  gh 
and  the  up-stroke  I  are  generally  used,  the  others  being 
employed  only  in  connection  with  other  strokes  when 
the  first  mentioned  would  be  unhandily  written. 

96.  The  M-hook  is  alwiys  the  last  thing,  belonging 
to  a  stroke,  to  be  read ;  thus,  "^  ^;aift,  V^  Jine,  (j'  thin, 
{,  thine,  yv  run,  /^  line.  If  no  distinct  vowel  sound 
is  heard  between  the  stroke  and  the  hook,  no  vowel  sign 
is  written;  as,  \^  heaven,  \j  ocean;  where  a  third  place 
vowel  sound  is  heard,  the  sign  must  be  placed  on  the 
outside  of  the  hook;  thus,  ^— ^  inan,  (^  than,  — =>  coon; 
thus  the  vocalization  is  the  same  as  in  other  compound 
strokes. 

97.  Strokes  having  an  initial  circle  or  hook,  of  any 
kind,  may  also  have  a  final  hook  or  circle ;  as  N^,  plan, 
]•  strain. 

98.  When  the  n  is  the  last  consonant  in  a  word, 
followed  by  a  vowel,  it  must  be  written  at  length ;  as 
-'■^^  money,  ^/j^  China. 

Beading  Exercise  XXV. 


y 


3    'j«    ty 


'V.  -^...^^  K.^. 


^r  \^  A  /^^^ 


?   ^^    T— ^J 


L,-^ 


^f^f^^mmmwn^»w^'9'^^i^t>w^^9^^^^'t^^w^^m''l'mm<m'0m^wwwmmm^'mw**'^w^ 


\  Ji" 
""ill 
bill 

ref 


VO' 

cas 

e^ 
ho' 
ciri 
ho( 
wri 
wri 
leg 
] 
on 
cha 
wel 
n  XL 
evil 


mm» 


i«^wfaTwe»B3Mwnwttw*** 


lAPHY. 

3,  whether  to  the  left 
iling  table. 
n  on  all  the  strokes; 
er,  be  of  any  advan- 
s  every  purpose  that 

,  the  down-stroke  gh 
led,  the  others  being 

other  strokes  when 
dily  written, 
ast  thing,  belonging 
in,   V^  yii'ie,    Q  thin, 
distinct  vowel  sound 

hook,  no  vowel  sign 
;  where  a  third  place 
St  be  placed  on  the 
,  (^  than,  — =>  coon; 
s  in  other  compound 

■cle  or  hook,  of  any 
r  circle;  as  \,plan, 

nsonant  in  a  word, 
ritten  at  length ;  as 

XXV. 


L-^ 


i^»i*W«^'<i^P«PV*^^W^^VW 


i^ 


THK  .V-UOOK. 


85 


WRiTn,u   ExEKcrsK  XXVI. 

Pan,  pin,  ha>n.  tan,  dsn,  (jaii,  jtrii,  knn,  -roii,  fjn,  van,  deii 
Jjn,  ojan  ran,  run,  Ion,  Ijin,  mjn,  m(un,  non, '  nsn;— opn 
[il«i.  gqrden,Jakn,  orgau,  orfan,  enlivn,  morn,  woriiij;.  foln 
balton,  roman,  wiaman.  Brsii,  dran,  restran,  pqrdu,  burdn 
retraii,  regan,  unjon,  absUm. 

THE  iV-UOOK  FOLLOWED  BY  A 

99.  When  s  follows  after  »?,  without  an  intervening 
vowel,  the  circle  may  be  turned  on  the  hook,  as  in  the 
c^  of  s  preceding  the  /-hook ;  thus,  V^-  futis,  -—^  man's, 
&y  machincx,  ^^  refrains.  With  the  straignt  strokes, 
howe^'er,  it  is  unnecessary  to  make  both  the  hook  and 
circle,  thus  ^  pm,  since  the  circle  itself  embraces  the 
hook,  aid  will  not  be  mistaken  for  s,  which  is  always 
written  on  the  other  side  of  the  stroke.  Hence  we 
write  ^  pens,  J-  dunce,  q/  chains, ^-^^ inourm  K 
begins. 

100,  The  double  circle  for  uses  is  conveniently  used 
on  the  straight  strokes,  for  such  words  as  J'  temes,  ^ 
chances,  •<vo  consequences;  but  as  a  double  circle  cannot 
well  be  formed  on  the  hook  attached  to  a  curve,  a  stroke 
n  must  be  used  in  such  words  as  V\,^  finances,  'C^ 
evinces. 

Reading  Exercise  XXVI, 


■T^^^^^^^^^^^^x^p^^  »»»»»»»»m»in      "w^i 


•  •>••«  *^TTV«i«>VWW^Pva 


MANUAL    OP    PHONOURAPIIY. 


Writing  Exercise  XXVII. 

Panz,  benz,  ponz,  tonz,  (janz,  ganz,  mornz,  burnz,  funz, 
orfanz,  balans,  remanz,  J^rmanz,  pronsns ;  komplanz,  eks- 
planz,  akordans,  kwestyonz,  kristyanz,  onjenz,  inklinz. 
Prinsez,  dansez,  kondeiiscz,  glansez,  ekspeusoz,  konsekwea- 
sez,  pronsnsez,  advansez,  konjeusez. 


101.  iV-HOOK  WORD-SIGNS. 

\  upon                    — 1>  can  [^  than 

\  been                      Va  phonography  (      alone 

J    done                    K^  phonographer  ^  men 

</  general-ly           Vs —  phonograpitio  ^— ^  opinion 


"MkP,! 


■  ■  . ^  .  .^^■.^>.^..^^. ........ 


Reading  Exercise  XXVII. 
.     </    ^^  "^     ^  y    /i^    .  '     \   X 

C  .1    c    C^ 


fx-.^,"?  J 


»»miiiiiiiii>»»»>ni     .■■'»T'r^9'i'rwnFw^'i'ww^9wr^>^fV^^'>i''r9w^*  »»■>»■ 


L 


<r->. 


L 


^ 


^ 


K 

lesiK 
nj/iT 
'bin' 
tu  it 

Ti 
hwol 
begi? 
'prim 
kens 

In 

wi(i  1 
reljai 

'Ri 
Kuraj 
'dan' 

Tr 

sensi 


^  II » » 


■gr^.'gr 


^^I^AAAAAi^ 


APHY. 


:xvii. 

mornz,  burnz,  Junz, 
sns ;  komplanz,  eks- 
iz,  onjenz,  inkljnz. 
!kspeiisoz,  konsekwea- 


3iaNS, 

(^  than 
phy       (     alone 
apher        ^  men 
•apliio    ^— ^  opinion 


u  • 


^^*******^Mrild^A**^ 


EXERCISE   ON   THE    TV'-HOOK. 


87 


<r-N 


.  ^\' 


Writing  Exercise  XXVIII. 

KURffJ. — Tra>  kuraj  haz  its  orijin  in  v^rtyii.  Animal  fer- 
lesnes  puts  on  de  semblans  ov  kuraj,  and  iz  ofn  takn  fer  it,  bj 
njn  St  ov  ten  amufl  'men';  but  de  falasi  ov  dis  'opinyon'  haz 
'bin'  Jon  bj  'jeneraP  eksperiens,  fer  prnodens  iz  ekwali  esenfal 
tu  it. 

Tu  ataw  trot)  kuraj  enter  'upon'  nutij)  rajli,  egzamin  wel 
hwot  de  ijq,  iz  Ijkli  tia  be,  and  farm  year  'opinyon'  befor  yoo 
begin.  H^f  'kan'  yo)  den  fer,  if  yo)  hav  gon  tu  wurk  'upon' 
'prinsipl',  and  hav  dun  el  yco  'kan'  dcD?  or  hwj  Jud  ya>  fel  a 
kons?rn  fer  konsekwen«ea,  hwiq  hav  'bin'  eiredi  wad  bj  yoo? 

In  humbl  reljans  'upon'  de  aaistans  ov  Hevn,  go  opnli  and 
wid  konfidens  tu  finij  ytor  planz.  Sis  simpl  fafi  -alon',  de 
reijans  ov  qiidren  'upon'  a  divjn  Fqder,  wil  kari  yco  satli  trcD. 

'Remember'  dis  'trcot',  hsever,  'dqr'  iz  'jenerali'  'mor'  tra 
Kuraj  Jon  bj  a  pasiv  rezistans  tu  de  skent  and  snerz  ov  'men' 
'dan'  haz  'bin'  sen  in  eni  bodili  dcfejis  hwotever  ' 

TrcD  kuraj  iz  bj  no  menz  savaj  vjolens,  nor  a  fmlhqrdi  in- 
sensibiliti  tu  danjer;  ner  u  hedstrog  rafnes  tu  run  sudcnli  intu 


>»»»»»  iiiiiiiii<tniii»m,». 


I  p  •  •  •  »*r^if^w 


I 


-^     f 


r 


is  ; 
to  ] 
in 
pre 

\ 
\ 

V 


10 
on  tl 
it  is 
size, 

10 
minai 
vowel 
is  rea 


aBaa^ss*"" 


**%t 


miAi'iiY. 

om'  de  jTiiverniD  p»er  ov 
nifl — de  kuraj  ov  a  man 


roproscnt?  (9:i.)  On  which 
tten?  On  which  aide  of  ihu 
Icnot  written?  (95.)  Whioh 
?  (86.)  How  iiro  tlio  n-h(iiili 
,  the  Btrolto  n  bo  eni|ili)yi'il? 
i  on  tho  curves?  How  on  the 
0  eirtilo  when  written  in  tho 
t  stroke  wuril-signs;  the  curved 


I  '{''r  iiii  yumtBt-  in  Mw 


:- I   III. 


XtBBnn  9. 


-StfJ\^.H00K-VOWELCONTRACTI0X3-mSSYLLABIO 
DIPHTHONGS. 

is  !,?t'  on?',*'"'"^'^  ''"  '""°"'^"*  "^'*''»'^;   *'^«t  ■•«.  it 
8  not  entirely  phonetic,  in  that  it  is  but  one  sign  used 

in  ZT^  f  rr°""''^  '  '"*  °^—  '^^  ~  exist 

TABLE   OP  THE   SHJV-HOOK. 
I  t-shn         </ch-shn 


\  p-shn 
\>  b-shn 
V)  f-shn 
Vi  v-shn 


I,  d-shn 

6  th-shn 

(j  th-shn 
U  r-shn  /^ 
^O  m-shn        vo  n-shn 


c    j-shn 
c)  8-shn 
l)  z-shn 
^''  I-shn  ([^ 
ng-shn 


— 3  k-shn 
— =  g-shn 
Cy  sh-shn 
(J  zh-shn 


<^    h-shn 


103.  On  the  straight  strokes,  the  shn-hook  is  made 
on  the  opposite  side  from  the  .-hook;  and  on  the  eurves 
•t  IS  made  in  the  position  of  the  n-hook,  but  double  its 
size,  as  illustrated  above. 

104.  The  most  general  use  of  this  hook  is  at  the  ter- 
m.nationofwordsjas     \.  option,  \--' porU-on.     If  a 

owel  follows  the  stroke  on  which  the  hook  is  written  it 
^s  read  between  the  stroke  and  the  hook;  as  \,  ..a^W^ 
^^jeluHon.,    fX  adoration,    l*  consideration. 


c«y) 


^ 


.-jssisx:^ -^    ••'-**»» 


r'i^       ■■inriTTi-lf— inTIIWI 


mmm^   — 


i.Vl  I 


,^^^^^u^h^*ik^f>^*;!|^^^^ 


'''.."■•  '■****-•' 


90 


MANUAL   OF   I'HONOdHAPHY. 


105.     Tho  »hn-U»V.  is  ofto.i  couvenanxly  uned  h.  the 
middle  oi'  a  word  ;  thus,  U^dictionarii,  y^j"^'     rev 

ohiliotuiry.  . 

H.O  The  ^-circle  may  be  ndd.^d  >,y  writu.,-  it  d.s- 
tinctly  on  t..o  in.idc  of  thcHO  h- .ks,  to  tho  .tnu,U 
ntrokcH  as  WCil  as  the  curve.,;  thus,  1,  rondUiom,  ~-\S 
invasions.  "  o 

107.    WouD-8ioNS.-^o?yW«)«,Vi«»^y'""«>"'  -" 

octijsii'n.  ^  / J 

REAmNQ   KXERCISE  XXV I II. 

\,.   r-  ^  T  ^a-  ^-=    ^'l,   ^ 

y^a  v^-^rb.^  ^  L  ^ 
■\r  -LT  .ir-^  'V  i-^  ^-j?  '■ 

"WKiTiNa  Exercise  XXIX. 


komnnikaj 

ilngon, 

amunijd  -  -■•  ,    , 

vafon,   Biipervi3on,  kohcsou.  -Dor^r,, 


t 


lAl'HY. 


renioiiily  UHetl  i'l  the    \ 


•y 


■d  by  writiiii.'  U  ilia- 
.okn,  to  the  ^*trlli,^ht 
,  jj   coiiditioim,     ~'\i^' 


^  1-  P'^  i 

3  XXIX. 

fon,  kondijon,  negafon, 
likajon,  fu3on,  invason, 
rnofon,  admijon,  najon, 
selekjon,  delegajon,  depri- 

I,   revolnjonari.      Pajonz, 
nojonz,  admiuistrajonz. 

ijTi " '^ 


^********^^MM 


I 


VOWKI,    <J(»M f UA»  fiONH. 


yi 


KIS.     VowKi,  C(.sriiArTioxs,_Tho  vowels  being  so 
minply  and  .■;.HiIy  IV.n.u,,!,  I.ut  litMo  i«  to  he  dusirtd  ia 
thu  way  of  ahlMoviatii.K  the  me(l.„J  of  writii.^r  them; 
but  as  eonsitler.Me  time  if.  lost  by  liftin-  the  pen   in 
puHHinj,'  from  one  to  an()th..r,  it  is  no  Hn.all  ailv.intjipo  t,, 
write  two  vo",.l  sounds    in   one  sign,  where   it  en 
done  without  ambirruity.     Sueh   a  euntra.tmn   ' 
eonmion  in  wurds  where  the  short  vowel   /  ntuu 
preeedes  un-.ther  of  the  simple  vowl-.  as   ii     Mi 
variant,  <ffl,u-ui,  euinirmtion,  mtiu  :   beeoniing      ca 
vnn,m,   >'ffl,mja,   aiuur^ntio,,.,    m.yo.       This^ooalit,,,,,    of 
vowels  <i,  nearly  pn.duees  th..  arti,,Mil,.tiens  >/>;  yi,  yo,  yn, 
that  the  si;,r„s  f„r  those  improper  d-|.hthon-s  are  used  iri 
8ueh   cases;    thus,    S^^/,  varw,,.,   .^.  ass,jciation,     .-/' 

10!).  J)rssYi,r,Aiiio  DfPHTRo.vrm._The  fullowin-  is 
ati  additional  seale  of  diphthongs,  simply  formed,'and 
some  of  which  are  very  useful : 


as  in 
foil  is. 


<  ai 


qi 


01 


oi 


clui/ci/,   z^  minci/, 


0)1  : 


oiriiiq. 


L.  stoic,    ^> 


110.     The   close   diphthong   heard   in   the   word   m/r 
though  dillering  but  little  from    ^  |  /,  is  written  thus,  '    ' 

Hkadinu  Exeuoise  XXIX. 

^■-  'x..  ■">   -•^■^  v^^  v^  . 


aiw^' 


a^Mwtattaaki 


Writinq  Exercisb  X  >  X. 

ajon,  hoineopnti. 

Klni    floi.  biloi,  stoiltal,  loeat,  glH'- 

Ambi  on    .  de  'okajon'  ov  sedijon.  konf«3on,  and  desola- 
f„r   Warazez  'everi'  evil  etnojon  and  pajon. 


,, 


» n 


HIKAIMIV. 

I 


^  ^  r  I 


DI8B    X>  X. 

us,   konveniens,   eksperiens, 
abreviajon,  paliajon,  alevi- 

ijon,  konfujon,  and  desola- 
)n  and  pajon. 

wiq  had  'bin'  tron  awa,  put 
d  iKistynrz,  began  tu  bra,  m 
ro)  dc  tloks  intu  tenbl  kon- 
n  and  wud  bav  bin  struk  wifl 
1  lisniD  tnor  klosli,  he  sffin  bo 
•rover,  de  asez  erz  stikiD  «t. 


I   t 


fe-=' 


mi 


r 


w 


A 


W  ^P 


"^14 


IMAGE  EVALUATION 
TEST  TARGET  (MT-3) 


1.0 


1.1 


^1^  U^ 


1.25  II  1.4      1.6 

- 

^ 

6"     

► 

Hiotographic 

Sdences 

Corporation 


23  WEST  MAIN  STREET 

WEBSTER,  N.Y.  U5S0 

(716)372-4503 


'''/ 


/y 


%' 


CIHM/ICMH 

Microfiche 

Series. 


<"^ 


CIHM/ICIVIH 
Collection  de 
microfiches. 


Canadian  Institute  ?or  Historical  Microreproductions  /  Institut  Canadian  da  microraproductions  historiquas 


<•  ^-^ 


"^K"^ 

.^^ 


mam 


tmmmmmmmm 


w 

him 
"\ 
hav  ; 

A] 
risot 


Re 

made' 
(105. 
IIoiT  i 
plain 
18  aye 


rij-i-ai 


5/yiV^  HOOK   EXERCISE   AND   KEVIEW. 


93 


Wid  no  hezitajon  he  ran  up  tvi  de  as,  and  wid  hiz  kujel  bet 
I  him  severli,    saig: 

"Ya>  foe!,  yo)  hav  'bin'  de  'okajjon'  ov  sk^riD  de  floks,  but  H 
hav  ym  tu  no  oldo  ya>  luk  lik  a  Ijon,  yet  yoo  bra  lik  an  as!" 

APLIKQZON. — Afektajon  wil  Jiirli  ekspoz  a  man  tu  de- 
ri3on  in  proporjon  tu  hiz  asumjon. 


Revirw. — ([103.)  On  which  side  of  the  atraight  strolces  is  the  «An-hook 
made?  How  is  it  mndo  to  the  curves?  (101.)  How  is  thn  «An-hoo1<  read? 
(105.)  How  may  it  be  used  except  at  the  torininatiun  ot'  words?  (103.) 
HoiT  ia  the  «-circle  added?  (107.)  What  am  the  word-signs?  (103.)  Ex- 
plain the  vowel  contractions.  (109.)  The  dissyllabic  diphthongs,  Huw 
IS  aye  written? 


fwwwwr-r^v'tm  »  »  »i » i»  mt^^^^f'^T^'^w^^iv^fm^'Wf'v^^'v^^ww^'rwwwmmm 


w 


iigigiiiwtiii^ 


XtBBZn  10. 


HALF-LENGTH  STR0KK3. 

In  consequence  of  the  frequent  recurrence  of  the 
sounds  t  and  d,  it  is  found  very  convenient,  and 
sometimes  necessary,  to  give  them  another  and  more 
contracted  repicsentation. 

110.  But  every  philosophical  means  has  already  been 
resorted  to  for  the  purpose  of  giving  to  Phonography 
the  ultimatum  of  brevity ;  and  if  the  following  scheme 
has  only  the  semblance  of  philosophy  in  it,  it  will  be  as 
much  as  can  be  expected.  In  chemistry,  it  is  well 
known,  the  more  a  substance — a  poison,  or  steam,  for 
instance — is  concentrated;  the  greater  is  its  power :  so, 
in  order  to  get  a  repetition  of  the  consonants  /  and  d 
without  writing  them  at  length,  the  single  strokes  |  and 

I ,  by  being  compressed  into  half  their  length,  are  made 
to  represent  the  addition  of  a  <  and  d.  Resort  is  had  to 
the  same  means  for  the  addition  of  t  and  d  to  ""  the 
other  consonants,  except  the  strokes  y,  w,  h,  nr;  'L 

are  not  made  half-length. 

111.  To  illustrate  this  principle,  suppose  the  word 
faded  is  to  be  written:  there  are  three  co  isonants  in  it, 
all  downward  strokes,  which  would  carry  the  last  d  the 
length  of  two  strokes  below  the  line;  buc  by  making  the 
first  d  half  its  usual  length,  another  d  is  supposed  to  be 
added,  and  the  word  is  thus  neaily  written :   ^   faded. 


sounc 
ho  we 
light 
from 

\. 

11^ 
the  { 

these 
sake 

^^ 
ddig] 
be  ad 
it  is  I 

11! 

or  ei 
made 
swift, 
>>  bet 
the  0 
strok 


m) 


r. 


ES. 

recurrence  of  the 
f  convenient,  and 
another  and   more 

IS  has  already  been 
g  to  Phonography 
I  following  scheme 
in  it,  it  will  be  as 
mistry,  it  is  well 
ison,  or  steam,  for 
r  is  its  power:  so, 
onsonants  /  and  d 
ngle  strokes  |  and 
iV  length,  are  made 
Resort  is  had  to 
t  and  d  to  ""  the 
y,  w,  h,  ny         < 

suppose  the  word 
5  CO  isonants  in  it, 
rry  the  last  d  the 
bi}6  by  making  the 
I  is  supposed  to  be 
ritten:   ^   faded. 


'JLUJl^UAiiULl^'  " ««*»< 

HALF   LENGTH   STROKES 


95 


The  principle  is  further  illustrated  by  the  following 
words:  Q.  talk,  C  talked;  /\  wrap,  /^  wrapped;  /^ 
live,  '^^  lived, 

112.  A  vowel  before  a  half-length  consonant  io  read 
before  both  letters;  as  \  apt,  ')  eaut,  ^  art,  _:  act;  but 
when  placed  after,  it  is  read  immediately  after  the  pri- 
mary letter,  and  the  added  t  or  d  follows,  it;  thus,  •"" 
caught,    ^  read,  X  spite,  \^contenipt,     ^    little. 

113.  As  a  general  thing  the  light  strokes,  when 
halved,  are  followed  by  the  light  sound  t;  as,  (  thought, 
^^  giA  ^  fottgfit;  and  the  heavy  ones  by  the  heavy 
sound  d;  thus,  ,)  iiaed,  '^  moved.  Frequently, 
however,  the  heavy  sound  d  is  read  from  a  half-length 
light  consonant,  and  vice  versa,  the  light  sound  t  is  read 
from  a  half-length  heavy  consonant;  as,  ^~^/'  melted, 
\^  peopled,  (\^alp1iahct. 

114.  Since,  however,  the  heavy  strokes  occupying 
the  places  of  r,  I,  m,  and  n,  are  not  made  half-length, 
these  four  letters,  when  followed  by  a^  d,  are,  for  the 
Bake  of  distinction,  made  heavy;  as,  ^'  eluxred,  y"  old, 
'^\^  formed;  and  light  when  a  t  follows;  as,  ";^  art,  \r 
delight,  \^  remit.  The  I  is  struck  upward  when  t  is  to 
be  added,  and  when  d,  downward,  since  in  this  direction 
it  is  more  easy  to  make  a  heavy  stroke. 

115.  Strokes  beginning  or  ending  with  the  «-ciicle, 
or  either  of  the  hooks,  or  both  hook  and  circle,  are  also 
made  half-length,  when  necessary;  thus,  n  speed,  v. 
swift,  T  treat,  X  complete,  '^  freight,  \-  straight,  -y  settled; 
"^  heads,  ^  mates,  \  band,  \i  patient,  %.  plant,  r->  grand; 
the  order  of  reading  being  the  same  aa  in  the  full  length 
strokes. 


Wvww«^ww*«w«www^p«w<<>«i| 


I- 


96 


MANUAL   OF   PHONOaHAPHY. 


116.  It  must  bo  observed  that  when  the  circle  »  is 
written  to  a  half-length  consonant  it  must  be  read  after 
the  added  t  or  d;  because  the  «  is  added  to  the  consonant 
after  it  has  been  halved,  and  because  it  cannot  be  added 
to  the  circle;  thus,  Spat,  \^pats,  (not pa»t,)  \^.  /at,\£ 
fats,  (not  /««<.) 

117.  Half-length  consonants,  unconnected  with  other 
strokes,  should  be  employed  only  for  words  containing 
but  one  vowel ;  as  ^  void,  v'  night;  and  the  two  full 
length  letters  should  be  used  in  words  containing  two 
or  more  \  owels ;  as   V.  avoid,  '"^  unit. 

118.  The  past  tense  of  verbs  ending  like  V'  part,  are 
more  conveniently  written  thus,  \/i  parted,  than  V| 

119.  There  are  a  few  words  in  which  t  and  d  occur 
three  times  in  succession,  which  make  it  necessary  to  sep- 
arate the  half-length  from  the  long  stroke;  as,  •'  |„  attitude. 

120.  Since  the  half-lengths  occupy  only  a  portion  of 
the  usual  space,  they  follow  the  rules  given  to  the  hori- 
zontals, of  accented  vowel  positions,  above  or  on  the  line 
according  as  the  consonant  has  a  first,  second,  or  third 
place  vowel ;  thus,  T  street,  <n  spread,  ^  find,  ^  found. 


^^ 


^ 


Beadinq  Exercise  XXX. 


<^ 


^  "^^ 


%         ^        ri-        t' 


>A-  -^  ^  v^\  ^^^/ 


Pt 

sent; 
ksnti 

[Stro 

upwc 


i^ 


»»»^R>W^P**«l>»»^****^P»^^n^»*<"F^>i^R^^PI^'^^^i*^^ 


^ufai*] 


t^^dXIi*^-  -  I 


aAPHY. 


when  the  circle  «  is 
it  must  be  read  after 
ded  to  the  consonant 
80  it  cannot  be  added 
notjja««,)  V  fat,  \^ 

connected  with  other 
For  words  containing 
\t;  and  the  two  full 
ords  containing  two 
unit. 

ing  like  \^  part,  are 
A  parted,  than  ^ 
trhich  t  and  d  occur 
:e  it  necessary  to  sep- 
troke ;  as,  J  |„  attitude. 
ipy  only  a  portion  of 
68  given  to  the  hori- 
I,  above  or  an  the  line 
irst,  second,  or  third 
id,  ^  find,  \^  found, 

XXX. 


Qi, 


<^ 


■^ 


«****i***<^rfcA>A^ 


***********<«0^*^A*^iXt^<ba^Aa.fcA^^ 


THK  i\'-HOOK. 


97 


Readinq  Exercise  XXXI. 
Pet,  fat.  Jet,  lat,  mat,  not,   spot,  skot,   savd,   salt,   »mit. 
8ent;-pernt,   bond,  kontend.    erdand.    enjend,   kjnd.    refind 
Hu    'fS   T'^;7P«"^,^>«"d-.  Pretendz.kontentstdii 

[btrokeh:  beted    habit,  Lurid, ]-peri Id,  uprit,  gqrded,  delited 
upward,  persevd,  <3ild,  lektyurd.  i'  i '  84^  «=",  ueiiiea, 

121.     Under  certain  circumstances  t  and  d  should  not 
be  represented  by  half-length  strokes :     Pint,  When  a 
vowel  follows  /  or  d  at  the  end  of  a  word;  thus,  having 
~~r  guilt,  \»e  cannot  make  guilty  by  placing  y  after  the 
half-length  I,  for  it  would  then  read  guilit;   hence  the 
stroke  t  must  be  written  in  order  to  give  a  place  after  it 
for  the  vowel;  thus,  ^'^y guilty.     Second,    lu   many 
words  of  one  syllable,  where  if  the  vowels  were  omitted, 
or   indistinct,  they  would  be  mistaken  for  the  vowel 
word-signs  J  thus,   \    bad,  instead  of  \.;   \    put,  in- 
stead of  \.        Thiid,  When  the  half-stroke"  would  not 
make  a  disdnct  angle  with  the  preceding  or  following 
stroke,  ae        J  amend,  instead  of  "^ , 

122.     HALF-LENGTH  WORD-SIGNS. 


_  f  quite 
(  could 

^    I  particular-ly 
( opportunity 
(that 


( 


(  without 


^  ("gentlemen 
(  gentleman 

^—    great 

c_   called* 

=~    according-ly* 


_  1^0^ 
(good 

I  cannot 
"^  I  account 

f  went 
"^  I  wont  T 

(  not  ( 

"  t  nature  v 

""     might*  'N 

)     establish-Sa "'  ^ 
!)    short*  ^ 


^  I  immediate-ly 
(  made 

"v   f  Lord 
(  word 
r      told 
toward 

thought* 
after 

spirit* 
under 
world 


■^^'^^■^^'WWWWW^ 


mmmmm 


98 


MANUAL   OF   PHONOOBAl'UY. 


JReadino  Exebcise  XXXI. 


s  .)  C  ^^/4 


vr       -S 


^ 
^ 


\ 


-7><:>     9 


1       -^^      X         A 


^ 


"N     ,     r. 


r  ^  r 


'/> 


-v^^ 


•) 


lpiWW^'W^PW^'^^PiV<l>^V^^V^ 


W»»W»»WWW«««WWW>WH|PWW<»"WW»»W**^WW»^»' 


Rkti 

Explaii 
erul  rul 
are  not 
heavy  i 
and  r  si 
the  ciro 
after  tb 
occur  t! 
stroke  e 


ST    AND     ^rU     LOOPS. 


99 


WRiTiNa  Exercise  XXXII. 

LeRENS  L£[ZI,  OR  LERNIIJ  FQNOGRAPI. 

Tu  l?rn,  er  'not'  tu  l^rn,  'AaV  iz  de  kwestyon: 

H  Wilder  'tiz  nobler  in  de  mind  tu  sufcr 

3e  komploks  kwiblz  ov  ambigynus  Loghand; 

Gr  tu  opoz  wid  pen  and  vtw  a  fcszand  erorz, 

And,  bj  opozip,  end  dom? — Tu  l?ru,— tu  r^t, — 

And,  bj  Fonografi  tu  »a  we  end 

Se  folBitiz,  tie  tszand  tedyus  ilz 

Lo]]hand  prodiisez — "tiz  a  kumsumajon 

Devstli  tu  be  wijt.     Tu  ijt; — tu  l?rn; — 

Tu  l?rn!  but  den  tu  wurk; — qi,  d^r"z  de  rub; 

For,  tu  akwjr  dis  cirt,  hwot  tal  nia  kum 

Ar  i  kan  Jufi  of  mi  habite  old, 

Xud  giv  me  poz;  d^r'z  de  rcspekt 

'Hat'  maks  Grtograt'i  ov  ho  I05  lif; 

Fer  La>  wud  bqr  de  iniimerabl  ilz  ov  Loghand, 

Its  Ixirbarus  le^jfi,  its  ambigiiiti. 

Its  Qild-tormentig  difikultiz,  and 

Its  wont  ov  rcDl,  tugeder  wid  de  ttrl 

Hwig  pajent  skribz  ov  suq  a  siatem  hav, 

Hwen  he  himself  'mit'  hiz  relesment  mak 

Wid  a  Duzn  Lesonz?    Hm  yet  wud  y^z 

ais  bq,rbarus  relik  ov  sr  bi-gon  daz, 

But  'dat'  de  drod  ov  sumtig  tu  be  l^rnt,— 

('ilat'  wek  unmanli  ez,  from  ha>z  embras 

No  lazi  man  kan  irct,) — puzlz  de  wil, 

And  maks  him  rader  bf^r  e"n  folsitiz, 

3an  l^rn  de  troit  he  yet  noz  nuMg  ov. 

3.ua  indolens  Ua  oft  retq,rdz  de  mind; 

And  dua  de  progres  ov  a  ynsful  qrt 

Iz  tjekt,  but  not  prevented;  fer  de  tim 

Wil  kum  hwen  dia  sara  href  Fonografi 

£al  triumf  ot  its  final  oponent 

Rktikw. — (110.)  What  in  the  aecond  mode  for  representing  (  and  d  f 
Explain  the  philoaophy  uf  halving  a  consonant.  (113.)  What  is  the  gen 
eral  rule  for  knowing  whether  at  or  ad  is  added?  (114.)  What  strokes 
are  not  written  half-length?  Wh.^t  half-length  light  strokes  are  made 
heavy  for  the  addition  of  d  f  In  what  direction  are  the  half-lengths  ) 
and  r  struok,  for  the  addition  otdf  fer  the  addition  ottf  (llA.)  When 
the  circle  t  is  written  at  the  end  of  a  half-length  sign,  is  it  read  before  or 
after  the  added  tordf  ( 119. )  How  are  words  written  in  which  t  and  d 
occur  three  times  in  succession?  (121.^  What  is  the  first  case  in  which  a 
stroke  should  not  be  halved  for  a  following  t  or  df  The  second?  the  third? 


^'^^V^P^"^^*^^"! 


f»*W«»W«^'»WW<P*< 


mm 


Iff 


^^MftA^M^^rfM 


^^^l^^^ftrfWhi*A*ifcil 


h«****AAAAih**^^Mi 


lesson  11. 


SPECIAL  CONSONANT  CONTRACTIONS. 

The  A-circle,  initial  and  final  hooks,  and  half-length 
stems,  are  contracted  modes  of  writing  that  admit  of 
general  application,  and  of  perfect  vocalization.  But 
as  Phonography  studies  the  greatest  degree  of  abbrevia- 
tion, consistent  vrith  legibility,  a  few  combinations  of 
consonants,  and  some  syllables  of  frequent  occurrence, 
are  provided  with  special  forms  of  contraction,  some  of 
which  only  are  capable  of  vocalization. 

Of  these  there  are  the  frequent  it,  in  the  past  parti- 
ciple of  verbs  ending  in  x,  in  the  superlative  of  adjec- 
tives, and  in  many  other  words,  as  pressed,  wisest,  stiff; 
the  str  in  the  comparative  of  adjectives,  &c.,  as  faster, 
sister;  the  initial  in,  of  instruction,  inspiration,  dhc,  and 
the  final  s-shn  of  some  nouns,  as  position;  many  of  which 
it  would  often  be  inconvenient  to  write  with  tho  means 
thus  far  aff'orded. 

There  are  also  prefixes,  derived  from  the  Latin,  of 
frequent  occurrence,  but  of  inconvenient  length,  as 
accom-plish,  imon-siderate,  recom-pense,  enter-prise,  circu.n- 
vent.  The  method  of  writing  these  contractions  consti- 
tutes the  last  lesson  proper  of  the  system,  and  is  one 
that  should  receive  special  attention,  in  order  that  the 
somewhat  arbitrary  mode  of  writing  shall  not  be  for- 
gotten. 


(100) 


123. 
by  the 
purpose 
Tunnin) 
the  »-ci 
which  i 
\j  bast 
In  othc 
consoni 
bined  s 
and  by 

124. 
striking 
circle  o 

126. 
the  wor 
may  be 
d,  ch,  j 

126. 
r-hook, 
r;  thus 
the  n-l 
as   ]•   < 

227. 
a  limite 

128. 
it  or  zd. 
be  used 

129. 
of  the 
{)   siste 


f^^^^^^;,;-;' 


^Mktt^«teft>ft>**AAArib**^^Mi 


IACTI0N3. 

ks,  and  half-length 
ting  that  admit  of 
vocalization.  But 
degree  of  abbrevia- 
iw  combinations  of 
equent  occurrence, 
Dntraution,  some  of 
n. 

t,  in  the  past  parti- 
iperlative  of  adjec- 
pressed,  witeat,  stiff; 
kives,  &c.,  as  faster, 
nspiration,  dhc,  and 
ion;  many  of  which 
ite  with  tho  means 

from  the  Latin,  of 
vrenient  length,  as 
!,  enter-prise,  circu.n- 
contractions  consti- 
system,  and  is  one 
,  in  order  that  the 
;  shall  not  be  for- 


ST   AND    STR     LOOPS. 


101 


THE   LOOPS  ST  AND  STR. 

123.  The  plan  of  writing  st  in  some  shorter  way  than 
by  the  circle  »  and  stroke  t,  was  devised  chiefly  for  the 
purpose  of  still  farther  obviating  tho  difficulty  of  words 
running  too  far  below  tho  line.  By  simply  lengthening 
the  «-circle  to  one-*liird  the  length  of  the  stroke  on 
which  it  occurs,  the  sound  of  I  is  added;  thus,  >o  base, 
\  based,  ^/^  rejuice,  ^^Q  rejoiced;  \J  vast,  *^  priest. 
In  other  words,  a  loop  written  one-third  the  length  of  the 
consonant  to  which  it  is  attached,  tepresents  the  com- 
bined sounds  of  s  and  t,  with  no  vowel  between  them ;' 
and  by  license  it  may  also  represent  xd, 

124.  The  8  or  z  may  be  added  for  plurals,  &o.,  by 
striking  the  loop  iwrough  the  long  sign  and  forming  the 
circle  on  the  opposite  s'de;  as,  ^  beasts,  >.^  nests. 

125.  This  loop  may  z\<*n  h^  written  initially;  as  in 
the  words  '\  stop,  'f  state,  \^  shiff,  ^  (J  style.  And  it 
may  be  used  between  two  strokes,  only  when  written  to  t, 
d,  ch,  j ;  as  (yil_  testify,    \y^\P  distinguish,  ^^  juttify- 

126.  When  this  loop  is  writt«n  in  the  position  of  the 
r-hook,  like  the  s-circle  it  takes  the  additional  power  of 
r;  thus,  ^  stooper,  "  sticker;  and  when  turned  in 
the  n-hook  position,  it  assumes  the  power  of  that  hook; 
as    J"    condensed,  ^o  against. 

227.  Half-length  strokes  also  admit  of  the  s^loop,  to 
a  limited  extent ;  as         midst,  ,S-  student. 

128.  When  a  word  begins  with  a  vowel,  followed  by 
tt  or  zd,  the  half-length  stroke,  and  not  the  loop,  must 
be  used;  as,  "\^  history,  'l^  wisdom,   i-^  system. 

129.  By  extending  the  loop  to  two-thirds  the  length 
of  the  stroke,  r  is  added ;  as  in  the  words  ^  Webster, 
}j   sister,  "^  master.     This  loop   should   not  be  used 


» ■...■■....■■■ii 


n«w< 


iwawiiii 


If 


I    M^AAiki*****' 


102 


-- •^-^—'-—'-••^^-'-•-••^ 

MANUAL   or    PII()N(t«»RAPIIY. 


■ 

I 


initially.  It  may  bo  turned  on  tho  n-hook  «ide  of  the 
stroke  to  expre«»  mfr ;  an  \  puii»ter\  and  tho  circle  i 
may  be  used  a»  with  tho  «<-loop ;  thu"*.  -^  /eitteri,  ^, 
matters. 

130.  WoBD-siON. — The  nf-loop  is  used  as  a  word-sign 
for  fiitt,  written  on  the  line  and  inclined  to  the  right, 
thus,  t .  I 

Readinq  ExEnnsE  XXXTI. 

ip^  <4^   <^-  .^  X 

i^    A    V   /^    ^    ^     \    \^ 

Wbitinq  Exercise  XXXIII. 

Part,  b<Mt,  dust,  tast,  qest,  kost,  gU8t,  fest,  safest,  rost, 
arest,  arszd,  rust,  iMt,  last,  mist,  most,  amiizd,  fjneat,  de- 
n^nst;— stfflp,  stedfast,  stagnant,  stif,  stov,  ster,  stii,  stem; 
— stoper,  stajer,  stager;— distioktii,  justifikajon;— bfsts,  hosts, 
kasts,  rezists,  infests,  masts;— stilt,  st^rd,  stord,  stamt;— 
kondenst,  agenst.  Boster,  bluster,  faster,  blister,  sister,  im- 
poster;— punster,  spinsters.  Stated,  advanst,  suprest,  oretekst, 
prodiist. 

g.iii;iiiiii ''*' 


V 


k 


ae 

salig  ^ 
west  ( 
fomii 
de  feri 
mad  t 
bresti; 
suprei 


***A*rfiik**<M 


lAPIIY. 


I  n-hook  nido  of  the 
ter;  unci  tho  circle  i 

u",    -^  /i»tiri,    ^, 

1  used  as  a  word-sign 
iclinud  to  the  right, 

KXXTI. 

\    \     i     -k 


<^ 


f\.  -^ 


SCXXIII. 


;ust,  fest,  safest,  rost, 
ost,  atniizd,  fjneat,  de- 
,  stov,  ster,  stil,  stem; 
»tifika/on; — bfsta,  boats, 
st^rd,  stord,  stamt; — 
aster,  blister,  sister,  im- 
Ivaust,  Buprest,  oretekst. 


KXERClBKfl  ON  THE  ST  LOOP. 


103 


RiADINa    ExERfUSE    XXXIII. 


*-!» 

A 


)  :i' 


\ 


.    A    ^    \ 


Waitmo  ExERciSB  XXXIV. 

ae  TEMPEST.— On  fte  'f^rst'  da  trt  de  maiter  ov  »r  fast 
salio  vesel,  in  de  midst  ov  a  kqm,  protest  tu  se  in  de  distant 
west  a  teribl  sterm  aprocio.  At  'f^rst'  wb  hist,  but  84Dn  de 
fomig  krests  danst  upon  de  wavz;  de  blakest  klvdz  la>md  up; 
de  fersest  litnio  perst  de  giffini;  de  farpest  and  heviest  tunder 
mad  stalest  hqrts  trembl.  He  sterner,  mentim,  forst  h^r  wa, 
brestig  de  biloz  bravli.  Stedili  sterip  for  de  distant  port,  we 
suprest  vr  ferz  and  safli  re^t  de  land.' 


W««««««W««W«*«V^I^ 


rmmmmmmmmu^ 


I 


"MMH 


"liffc 


>Mi;Mk^**^**«i*A«iA**4lA^ 


>*A*<MrfM^*< 


104 


MANUAL   OF   PHONOGRAPHY. 


PECULIAR  MODE  OP  WRITING  JV  AND  SffK 
131.  When  the  sounds  gpr,  sir.  and  shr  follow  n  in 
such  words  as  inspiration,  instruct,  inscribe,  it  is  impossi- 
ble, with  the  former  mode  of  writing  n,  to  write  the  circle 
»r  to  the  strokes^  <,  k,  without  making  it  on  the  back 
of  the  n,  thus  ^  ,  which  is  difficult  to  do,  and  un- 
seemly when  done.  To  obviate  this  difficulty  the  stroke 
^— '  is  permitted,  in  these  cases,  to  be  struck ,  backward 
or  vertically,  as  the  nature  of  the  case  may  require ;  but, 
as  there  is  never  occasion  for  any  vowel  but  the  first 
place  t,  the  stroke  for  the  n  need  not  be  written  full 
length ;  indeed,  it  may  be  regarded  as  the  n-hook  used 
initially;  thus,  ll,  instruction,  \  imnperable,  ^~\ 
inscription.  \ 

132.  In  a  considerable  class  of  words  the  syllable 
tion  follows  after  the  sound  of  «  or  z,  as  poution,  decisim, 
&e.,  which  would  require  that  the  strokes  for  these 
sounds,  with  the  «An-hook  appended,  be  employed ;  but 
such  would  be  inconvenient  forms,  and  hence  it  is 
allowable  to  use  the  circle  and  turn  a  hook  for  tion  on 
the  opposite  side  of  the  stroke;  thus,  4' *ct««,«,  M. 
supposition;  the  same  license  is  allowed  for  the  loops  st 
and  str;  thus,  .7>/=^  molestation,  '^-  illustration.  This 
hook  is  used  in  some  such  words  as%,  persuasion;  and 
It  may  also  be  used  when  followed  by  the  termination 
al;  as.  No  positional. 

133.     If  it  be  required  to  write"  the  syllable  tim  after 
n»,  the  circle  for  the  latter  combination  may  be  em- 
ployed, and  the  hook  turned  on  the  opposite  side;  thus, 
V   compensation.     The  plural  may  be  formed,  in  all 
these  cases,  by  adding  the  circle  to  the  «An-hook';  thus, 
S^  superstitions,   f^.  condensations. 

- 


'  >WWW«vv^>«iw« 


PHONOGRAPHY. 


fV^RITINQ  Jf  AND  SffJV^. 

iipr,  str.  and  shr  follow  n  in 
struct,  inscribe,  it  ia  impos^i- 
'  writing  n,  to  write  the  circle 
lout  making  it  on  the  back 
is  difficult  to  do,  and  un- 
iate  this  difficulty  the  stroke 
uses,  to  be  struck ,  backward 
f  the  case  may  require ;  but, 
For  any  vowel  but  the  first 
n  need  not  be  written  full 
garded  as  the  n-hook  used 
ion,  ^\     insuperable,   '^     \, 

!las8  of  words  the  syllable 
f  8  or  «,  as  position,  decision, 
;hat  the  strokes  for  these 
)pended,  be  employed ;  but 
it  forms,  and  hence  it  is 
id  turn  a  hook  for  Hon  on 
roke ;  thus,  4*  decision,  % 
is  allo^d  for  the  loops  st 
tion,  T^  illustration.  This 
)rd8  as  ^<  persuasion;  and 
llowed  by  the  termination 

write  the  syllable  tim  after 
combination  may  be  em- 
on  the  opposite  side;  thus, 
iral  may  be  formed,  in  all 
ele  to  the  (An-hook ;  thus, 
'ons. 


EXERCISE   ON   THE   INITIAL   -V.    AC. 


105 


Reading  Exercise  XXXIV. 

Writing  Exercise  XXXV. 

Insiiperabl,  instrukt,  instrument,  instroDmentaliti,  inskribd 
inskrmtabl;— pozijon,  deaison,  kozajon,  siviliza/on,  muzifan' 
— tnanitestajon,  inkrustafon,  kondensafon,  iispensafon;— sup- 
ozijonz,  akiizajonz,  ilustra/onz,  sensajonz. 

Studi  kondensafon  in  yor  sJjl  ov  kompozi/on,  for  do  it  ma 
kost  y<D  sum  trubl  at  f^rst,  yet  it  wil  asist  yco  tu  master  per- 
spikijitt  and  presijon,  on  de  akwizijcn  ov  hwi^,  qast  and  pier- 
mi  ritio  iz  bast  Promted  hi  a  dezjr  for  de  akwizijon  ov  welt 
man  stemz  de  stermz  ov  de  ojan,  landz  on  everi  kost,  in  spit 
pv  de  gratest  danjsrs  arizig  from  kliniat  or  de  hand  ov  unsiviU 
izd  man.  Relijon  folwz  in  de  wak  ov  korn^re,  kontendin  agenat 
Its  eyilz;  and  dus,  hwjl  savaj  najonz  qr  blest  wid  de  Ut  ov  siv- 
ilizafon,  da  qr  put  in  poz«Jon  ov  de  wurd  ov  inspirafon,  and 
tet  de  egust  troodz  ov  de  gospel  dispensajon. 


"  ~ 


|i  -' 


If 


tf 


"Iti'in"  fin'i 


t«aMh*^AA*AA<k*****A*A^*A**A*A**AA*****di**********«I^Mk*' 


106 


MANUAL   OF   FHONOaRAPHT. 


Rkvikw.— <123.)  How  are  $t  and  td  writtenT  (124.)  How  may  the 
einile  be  added?  (126.)  In  what  Bituations  may  the  loop  be  writtenT 
(126.)  When  written  in  the  place  of  the  r-hook,  what  power  does  it  dre 
the  stroke?  What,  when  written  in  the  n-hook  plaoe?  (127.)  How 
should  the  words  midst  and  student  be  written?  (128^In  what  case  ig 
the  loop  not  to  be  used?  (129.)  How  is  ttr  written?  What  effect  does 
it  have  on  this  loop  to  place  it  on  the  n-hook  side?  If  the  sound  of  «  fol- 
low, how  is  it  written?  (130.)  What  is  the  word-sign  in  this  lesson? 
(131.)  When  is  it  neoessaiy  to  use  the  peculiar  mode  of  writing  nT  How 
is  it  written?  (132.)  Under  what  cironrastanoe  is  the  peculiar  sKn  em- 
ployed? How  is  it  written?  (133.)  Sapposo  it  be  required  to  writ  i  sKn 
after  nt,  how  is  it  done?    If  s  fellow  the  s\n,  how  may  it  be  written? 


13^ 
prcfii 
gestii 
be  wr 


Circu 


Irrero: 


•  p««««v<l^P«w^^>w^nni^ 


"Ml; 


QRAPHT. 


ittenT  (124.)  Huw  mar  the 
ns  maj  the  loop  be  writtenT 
look,  what  power  does  it  ^re 
n-hook  placet  (127.)  How 
ttenT  (128^  In  what  case  ig 
written?  What  effect  does 
[  sideT  If  the  lound  of  «  fol- 
Ihe  word-sign  in  this  lesson? 
liar  mode  of  writing  nf  How 
knoe  is  the  peculiar  thn  em- 
le  it  be  roqaircd  to  writ  i  «A» 
,  how  may  it  be  written? 


mmmmim 


leBBon  12. 


PREFIXES  AND  OTHER  CONTRACTIONS. 

134.  Prefixes.— The  following  are  some  additional 
prefixes  and  affixes  that  are  found  convenient  and  sug- 
gestive with  the  advanced  phonographer.  They  should 
be  written  near  the  word,  but  not  joined. 

Acmm  is  expressed  by  a  heavy  dot,  placed  before  the 
initial  end  of  the  following  consonant ;  thuei,  \_> 
accompany,   \^  accomplice. 

Circum,  by  a  small  circle  placed  in  the  first  vowel  posi- 
tjon  of  the   next  consonant;  as,  "J,  circtimstancr^ 
V    \  crlrcumscribe. 

T^-coni,  by    I    as,  I   jo    decomposition, 

I>iscom,  discon,  by  I,  as,  to/I     disconcerted, 

Incom,  incmi,  by  — ^  written  above  the  other  part  of 
the  word ;  as,     v  incomplete,     '1^  inconsistent. 

Inter,  intro,  by  ^  in  any  position  near  the  following 
letter;  as,  ^' v.«  imfcmctc.  La  introduction.  By 
sonio  kind  of  license  the  frequent  word  interest  is 
allowed  to  be  written  thus:  [  ,  the  prefix  inter 
being  united  with  the  stroke  8^ 

Irrecon.  by      )  as,      ^^^   irreconcilahle. 


M«W*Wi«i«W«« 


w 


)  s 


i 


108 


MANUAL   OF   PHONOORAPHV. 


Magna,  magni,  by  '    ^  written  above  the  after  part  of 
the  word ;  eh,  "T^^—^  magnanirmms,      v^  magnify. 

Recog,  by  /  as,  /v~^  recognize. 

Recom,  recon,  by  /  as,  /w'  recommend,  x^5\  recon- 
cilable. 

Self,  by  a  circle  at  the  middle  place  of  the  next  conso- 
nant; as,   j/  Belfish 

Vhcom,  uncon,  by  ^ ^  written  on  the  line ;  as,  w^  un- 
common, .{^  unconditional. 

It  is  allowable  to  represent  a  prefix  which  is  similar 
in  sound  to  one  of  the  foregoing,  by  one  of  the  signs 
there  furnished ;  thus,  ^  may  represent  enter,  as  well 
as  inter;  and  — ^  may  represent  encum,  incum,  as  well 
as  incom,  incon. 

135.  Affixes. — The  following  affixes  are  written 
near  the  preceding  part  of  the  word: — 

Bility,  by   \  as,    y"\durabiHty,  "^n^  prohahility. 

Ly,  by  (  written  after  the  word  ;  thus,  ^i  ^  patiently, 
^  (  constantly.  But  where  it  can  be  written  on 
without  lifting  the  pen,  it  is  better  to  do  so ;  thus, 
•X^  abundantly. 

Ment,  by  '->  as,  ]^  ato)iement,  Jv-,  contentment.  But 
it  may  often  be  written  without  disconnecting  it 
from  the  body  of  the  word. 

Self,  by  a  circle,  as,     *     myself.     Selves,  by  making  the 
circle  double  size ;  as,  (o  tlusmselves,  fo    yourselves. 
Ship,  by  ^  as,   ^J  lordship. 

136.  A  word-sign  may  be  used  as  a  prefix  or  an 
affix ;  as,   ^   advantageous,  "   iL  hereafter. 


c/ 


•^''^^'^•••^^^"••'^^"^^'^T'^^r^^^^**'**'"»**»**^FWWWW^(»<»^W<»*' 


'^< 


RAPHY. 


ove  the  after  part  of 
irmms,      v^  magnify. 

mmend^  ^vo\  recon- 
36  of  the  next  conso- 
he  line;  as,  w^  un- 

efix  which  is  similar 
by  one  of  the  signs 
)resent  enter,  as  well 
mcum,  incum,  as  well 

;  affix>?H  are  written 
jrd: — 

'^^  probability. 

thus,  \;>  /^  patiently, 
t  can  be  written  on 
3tter  to  do  so;  thus, 

Ivn  contentment.  But 
out  disconnecting  it 

^lve»,  by  making  the 
selves,  fo    yourselves. 

d  as  a  prefix  or  an 
rea/ter. 


*^^A**<Mk*A*i« 


EXERCISE   ON    PREFIXES   AND    AFFIXES. 


109 


Reading  Exercise  XXXV. 

"^T  X.  /^^  -^-^  A  °^    -3«. 

-J^    ^  ;  C\  .U\  \r  ^ 


F*«<p«^^^»^^i^wwir«««<Mii 


11 


aa  ir'uuL4iu»,.ui»iuiiijii.m 


■••MHIMIiiMliHiMi 


SE:' ' 


110 


MANUAL   OP    PHONOORAPHY. 


Wbitinq  Exkrcise  XXXVI. 

Akompli/menl,  akomcKlaron,  s^rkumtloks,  s^rkumnavijiat, 
dekompoz,  diskontinynd,  inkompatibl,  inkonsolnbl,  inter- 
upjon,  introdiis,  magnifisent,  rekn<TniJon,  rekonsiliajon,  self- 
ajiirans,  unkompromizig,  posibiliti,  konsekwentli,  himself, 
hereinanjip,  d^rfor,  displcgi^r. 

L^rn  tu  akomodat  ycnrself  tu  g^rkumstansez.  S^rkumstan- 
Jftl  evidens  Jud  be  kojusli  entertand  agenst  hiiman  lif.  Be 
s^rkumspekt  in  ol  vffir  waz.  It  is  unkonformabi  tia  trmt  tu 
sa  dat  kompajon,  irendjip,  &s.,  qr  at  de  botom  onli  selfijncs 
ill  disgiz;  bekez  it  iz  we  sraelvz  ha  fel  plesur  er  pan  in  de 
gud  er  e"il  ov  uderz;  fer  de  menio  ov  selMuv  iz,  not  dat  it  iz 
I  dat  luvz,  but  dat  i  luv  mioelf. , 

If  de  ^ri)  be  s^rkumskrjbd  at  de  ekwator,  we  obtan  its 
^gratest  8?rkumferen«,  hwicj  iz  abst  24,780  milz;  a  magnitiid 
hwiq  we  kan  not  t^rm  inkonMevabI,  oldo  we  ina  not  entertan  a 
veri  distiijkt  jdea  ov  it,  mug  mor  wud  de  savaj  be  unkonjus  ov 
the  fakt  and  unkonvinst,  in  spjt  ov  ymr  endevorz  tu  proiv  it 
For  unles  tanjibl  prof  akumpani  de  as^rjon,  ym  kan  not  akom- 
plij"  yffir  am,  and  suq  praf  iz  unkontrov?rtibii  imposibl.  We 
rekomend  tu  el,  never  tu  undertak  givig  a  s^rkumstanjal 
eksplanajon  tu  doz  h(D  qr  inkompeteut  tu  understand  it. 

137.  Nominal  Consonant. — It  is  sometimes  neces- 
sary to  express  one  or  more  vowels  or  diphthongs  with- 
out a  consonant.  In  this  case  'f  'I'  J^ ,  may  be  em- 
ployed as  outlines  having  no  specific  values,  to  which 
the  vowels  may  be  placed ;  thus,  '\.  E.,  for  Edward  or 
Edmund;  ^  A.,  for  Alfred;  'Jc  Eah,  an  Irish  family 
surname,  &c.  The  dash-vowels  may  be  struck  through 
the  nominal  consonant,  as  J  0.,  for  Oliver,  -|-  U. 
Proper  names  should  be  written  in  full  when  they  are 
known. 


138. 
when 
lintten 
conson 


nant  ( 

139. 

circle 

the  vo' 

to  exp: 

140. 

tween 

in  spec 

ters  m 

ttamp, 

In  c 

nant,  t 

to  legil 

pone,  , 

141. 
which 
the  po 
betwee 
by  the 


RiTir 
Ditonm, 
moj/nit 
writtsnT 
mentt  ft 
neotion? 
oircumstf 
oinile  bo 
What  a 


■HS 


J:( 


f[<M>*i>*i^>ai*^««^>A«i*AA^^*^^ifc<«tiO**^*'^ 


RAPHY. 


XXXVI. 


VARIOUS   CONTRACTIONS. 


Ill 


imtloks,  8§rkumnavi^t, 
bl,  inkonsolnbl,  inter- 
iOn,  rekonsiliajon,  self- 
konsekwentli,    himself, 


mstnrisez.  S^rkumstan- 
agcnst  hiitnan  Ijf.  Be 
ikon  form  abl  tii  trmt  tu 
1e  botom  onli  selfijjics 
fel  plesur  er  pan  in  de 
selMuv  iz,  not  dat  it  iz 


ekwator,  we  obtan  its 
tJSO  mjlz;  a  magnitiid 
G)  we  ma  not  entertAn  a 
de  savaj  be  iinkonjus  ov 
)T  endevorz  tu  pratv  it. 
srjon,  yo)  kan  not  akom- 
av^rtibii  imposibl.     We 

givig  a  s^rkumstanjal 
t  tu  understand  it. 


t  is  sometimes  neces- 
Is  or  diphthongs  with- 
/|'  J^,  may  be  em- 
icific  values,  to  which 
^  E;  for  Edward  or 
Eah,  an  Irish  family 
»ay  be  struck  thrmigh, 
0.,  for  Oliver,  j-  U. 
n  full  when  they  are 


138.  Stroke  II. — The  stroke  h  is  generally  used 
when  it  is  initial  and  is  followed  by  «;  thus,  ^^^-^ 
hasten;  also  when  r  and  a  vowel,  or  r  and  some  other 
consonant  follow;  thus  ^-■'^"^  hurry,  ^^ — r^  horizontal, 
,;-— "^  hurt;  also,  in  words  that  contain  no  other  conso- 
nant than  hi,  and  end  in  a  vowel ;  thus,    ,~-r^    loly. 

139.  Vocalizing  the  large  Circle. — The  large 
circle  m  is  understood  to  represent  a  syllable  containing 
the  vowels  i  or  e,  thus,  sis  or  sea.  It  may  be  vocalized 
to  express  any  vowel  or  diphthong;  as,    1^  permas'i>e. 

140.  When  p  occurs  between  m  and  t,  and  k  be- 
tween ng  and  $h,  (the  jp  and  k  being  organically  inserted 
in  speech,  in  passing  to  the  next  consonant,)  these  let- 
ters may  be  omitted;  thus,  ^v  limp,  u^  limped,  ^*s 
stamp,   cTN  stamped,  ^^   anxiova,    |fJ    distinction. 

In  cases  where  t  comes  between  s  and  another  conso- 
nant, the  t  may  generally  be  omitted  without  detriment 
to  legibility  ;  thus,  y^p^  mostly,  y^  restless,  ^<^  post- 
pone, ,~ti'-  mistake, 

141.  Op  the. — The  connective  phrase  "of  the," 
which  merely  points  out  that  the  following  noun  is  in 
the  possessive  case,  is  intimated  by  writing  the  words 
between  which  it  occurs  near  to  each  other,  thus  showing 
by  their  proximity  that  the  one  is  o/  the  other;  thus, 
//<JXi_  ^om  of  the  beautiful,   ^^       subject  of  the  wwk. 

Rivirw. — (134.)  How  is  the  prefix  oeoow  written?  drcumf  Dectimf 
Ditoytn,  diieonf  Incnm,  iticnnt  Inttr,  intra;  interestt  Irreennt  Magna, 
laagfUf  Btcoff;  recom,  rtcont  Sel/t  I'ncom,  nnamt  How  may  enter  be 
written?  Encum  incumf  (135. )  Huw  is  the  affix  hUity  written?  lyt 
nentf  nlft  thiol  (136.)  What  is  said  about  word-signa  in  thia  oon- 
neotion?  (137.)  Explain  the  nominal  consonant.  (^138.)  Under  what 
olrcumstanoes  is  the  strolie  h  generally  used?  (139.)  How  may  the  doulkle 
oirole  be  vooaliied?  (140.)  When  may  p  be  omitted?  k,  and  fi  (141.) 
What  ii  said  of  the  phrase  ijf  the. 


m^^^^Fm^mmmm* 


I 
ill 


m- 


AA*<^MMBk*AA****A**4 


lesHon  13. 


UNVOCALIZED  WRITING  —  PHRASEOGBAPHY,  40. 

142.  As  in  8om<}  of  the  preceding  exercises  the 
manner  of  writing  certain  words  has  been  introduced 
that  would  not  admit  of  full  vocalization,  the  learner 
may  commence  omitting  some  of  the  least  prominent 
vowels  in  his  common  words.  As  a  general  thing  these 
omissions  should  be  the  unaccented  vowels.  But  in 
reporting,  no  vowels  are  inserted,  except  an  occasional 
one  that  is  necessary  to  distinguish  one  word  from  an- 
other, where  both  have  the  same  consonant  outline.  It 
requires  a  good  degree  of  familiarity  with  the  system  to 
be  able  to  read  this  style  of  writing  readily.  After  re- 
ports are  taken,  however,  it  is  customary  to  go  over  the 
manuscript  and  insert  the  prominent  vow  .Is,  so  that  any 
one  may  afterward  read  it  with  ease. 

143.  Positive  and  negative  words  containing  the 
same  consonants,  should  be  distinguished  thus : — When 
the  word  commences  with  r,  (except  this  letter  is  fol- 
lowed by  m,)  write  the  upward  r  for  the  positive  word, 
and  the  downward  one  for  the  negative  ;  thus,  ^^  re- 
sponsible, ^^  {rrcspomihlc ;  /^  resolute,  <S~  irresolute. 
The  common  words  -p-^  mortal,  ..jO~—  immortal, 
r^  material,  _'^_  immaterial,  may  be  distinguished 
bj  writing  the  positi^re  on  the  line,  and  the  negative 
above  it.  In  all  other  cases,  insert  the  initial  vowel  in 
the  negative  word ;  thus,  "<^  illegible,  &c.  The  vowel 
should  be  \7ritten  first,  that  it  may  not  be  omitted. 


y^np^o^^  II  ■ » » I  twmttvm^F^w^mir^^iF^fNiwm  »*  i  ■  ■  vf^^i^^i^^'^^w^i^'^f* 


LIST 


sy 


\ 


(112) 


10 


3. 


iSEOQBAPHY,  AC. 

3eding  exercises  the 
has  been  introduced 
alization,  the  learner 
the  least  prominent 
a  general  thing  these 
ted  vowels.  But  in 
except  an  occasional 
li  one  word  from  an- 
insonant  outline.  It 
;y  with  the  system  to 
5  readily.  After  re- 
}mary  to  go  over  the 
it  vow  .Is,  BO  that  any 
). 

ords  containing  the 
;uished  thus : — When 
ept  this  letter  is  fol- 
for  the  positive  word, 
;ative  ;  thus,  -^  re- 
tolute,      (f~  irresolute. 

il,  ...0::_-  immortal, 
ay  be  distinguished 
(le,  and  the  negative 

the  initial  vowel  in 
ibU,  &c.     The  vowel 

not  be  omitted. 


■  **« 


>***i****^^*A^^AAA^^<>A^I^^4 


WORDS   HAVING   THE   SAMR   CONSONANTS.  113 


LIST  OF  WORDS  CONTAINING  THE   SAME   CONSONANTS. 
Dutittguuhtd  by  a  diff»rene4  of  outlin*. 

V^   Nj     pattern,  patron 

\)      \       patient,  passionate 
\/\o  '\.      purpose,  perhaps 
\>  \/f      proceed,  pursued 

Nv/|     >s^  property,  propriety 
^\~S<^"  \    o  preparation,  appropriation  proportion 

\;  ^y::^   proportioned,  proportionate. 
"^^-^      Lo    protection,  production 

j   \/j   pertain,  appertain 

V-  \/~      prosecute,  persecute 

V-»    ^/^    prosecution,  persecution 

Vv       v^     oppressor,  pursuer 
N         >  beautify,  beatify 

Vf  N  birth,  breath 

kI      1      \.   Tartar,  traitor,  trader 
J     V  train,  turn 


li 


!'i. 


i' 


10 


I  I  •  •  •  »  »*"r»w*»*»*»i 


^^^^^^T^T^^T^^ »  H>»l 


4€ 


mt« Hinx 


^^^^<i«^<^i^«^^^^»*<b»****« 


114 


MANUAl,   OK    PIIONOOBAIMIV. 


I 


J  ^    L-<    attainable,  tenable 

J]...    \        daughter,  debtor,  anH  deter 

.^Y-!:^.  L    auditor,  auditory,  editor 

1       I     diseased,  deceased 

y      L    desolate,  dissolute 

|o     I    desolation,  dissolution 

f_^     [/'■^^     idleness,  dullness 

t-j     t-wJ     demonstrate,  administrate 

^    •     agent,  gentleman 
/     /^    gentle,  genteel 

T        cost,  caused 

.=:z±J.. /ta-  collision,  coalition,  collusion 

v'  N//    corporal,  corporeal 

J  credence,  accordance 

r^  y^  greatly,  gradually 

V«^     Vrv  favored,  favorite 

\a         fiscal,  physical 


;77.":' II 


Thi 
not  pi 
dent  ^ 
differe 
misrea 
words, 
necess 
the  fo 
possesi 


ijt,^gt^,M^ib^^^*;^J»»t, 


ftAl'UV. 


leter 
litor 


strate 


tion,  collusion 
oreal 


ice 


*»»w**^»*^p^p^^^'<'^ 


— i 


^****^*^-"'"'"*^f::'^'  •  •  •  • II 1 1 


WORDS   II A  VINO   THIS   8AMK   CONSONANTS 


115 


t 

J 


V-«.    ^^^^^  firm,  frame, — form,  farm 
\y     ^  support,  separate 

P         steady,  study, — stead 
l      situation,  station 
9       y       sure,   assure 
/A  ^^^     labored,  elaborate 
/^    /'^  .i    learned,  v.,  adj. 

/]        N  ^   '  l   W'tC)  reader,  orator,  rhetor 
/^    /     I   ruined,  renewed 
*^       y    impatient,  impassioned 
\_^        ^   innovation,  invasion 
^s^    -^       indefinite,  undefined 
^~V      ^~V,    tinavoidable,  inevitable 


"\ 


This  list  might  be  greatly  extended,  but  space  will 
not  permit  it  here ;  from  the  examples  given,  the  stu- 
dent will  learn  what  form  to  give  each  word,  where 
different  outlines  are  required  for  words  that  might  be 
misread  if  written  alike.  Quite  an  extensive  list  of 
words,  two  or  more  of  them  having  the  same  outline, 
necessarily,  are  distinguished  by  position ;  of  which  take 
the  following:  piety,i  pity,^  opposition, ^^  position,^ 
possession  ;'    prescription,^   proscription 2,  &c. 


'**VV^>*^>«W«W«>V>P*«iVWir««WWV^>«iWWW^ 


tte*nfe«v'*U»»".  ■ 


MiM 


116                        MANUAL   O*'    PIIONUURAIMIY.                                   j 

ALL  THE  WOKOSIONS   ALI'IIAUGTICALLY  ARRANOED. 

TioM  mark0d  with  a  *  an  urilUn  aixm  th4  tins. 

.    A 

1    dear 

v^in* 

'^  according* 

e difficulty 

0    is* 

-»  account 

1    do 

it 

/   advantage 

J    done 

■  kingdom* 

V.    after 

)    establiBh-*''  . 

^_^  lank,uage 

— ,  again 

^  every. 

>   Lord* 

*     all* 

B  first 

N,  member 

'      alone 

'^for 

'^  might* 

•    already* 

"^from 

(-""'more 

.    an, and 

I.  full 

<r-^  Mr.* 

^  are 

</  general-ly 

'"*"  my,  me* 

0    as 

</   gentleman 

-^   nature 

\be 

«/    gentlemen* 

v--/  no 

\  been 

—  give- a* 

^_^  iior* 

'*    beyond* 

-  God* 

^  not* 

1    but 

— .  good 

"^  object 

•^  call* 

c—  great 

\>  objection 

<^-  called* 

V.  have 

^     of* 

_can         ^^ 

'— N  him 

1    oh 

—»  cannot* 

*    how 

/  on* 

e — oare 

V    I* 

«_-^one 

^  cbild* 

'^  immediate-ly* 

' — '  opinion* 

.  come 

""^  important* 

%  opportunity       1 

—  could 

^-v,  improve-ment 

1  or* 





'  ou 

\ 

pn 

^ 

PI 

"Lpi 

\ 

Pr 

— 

q« 

<r^ 

'  re 

\ 

re 

J 

Hh 

,0 

Hh 

/ 

sh 

1        ' 
J 

80 

'\ 

sp 

\ 

BU 

\ 

HU 

iV 

BU 

1 

tol 

1   ( 

th 

• 

th 

( 

th 

ii 

th 

1      On 

!    sif; 

ns, 

in 

wh 

are 

re 

or 

bel 

1     Bug 

gei 

'  as  to  1 

HAI'ilY.                                   1 

ICALLY  ARRANQED. 

11%  abov*  th$  lin*. 

-^in* 

0    Ja* 

it 

—  kingdom* 

Dt 

^_^  lankjUage 

>   Lord* 

N  member 

"^  might* 

(T^more 

<i-^  Mr.* 

'~"  my,  me* 

■^   nature 

v_^  no 

«!_•  nor* 

vw/  not* 
"^  object 

\j  objection 

^     of* 

1    oh 

''  on* 

^«-^ono 

ySjC 

— ^  opinion* 

\  opportunity       i 

nt 

1  or* 

A  I- 1*   TIIK    WoHl>-HIUNH 


117 


)    their,  the 
'—'thing* 
(     think 

\a    this 

(     tlought* 
)   three 

—  toj^  ether 

r  toi.i 

1  fownrd 

]  truth 

\  two 

w  under 

\  up 

\  upon 
^  usual 

)  was 
^  way 

*  we* 
(Twell 
c--  went* 


re 


c   were 
*    what* 


'!« 


'  ought* 
N    particular* 
\o  Phonography 
V,  pleaBure 
\  principal"'' 
—  quite* 
<!'^  remark* 
\  rememht-r 
J  Hhiill-t 
^  short* 
/    should 
J   so 

■N   spirit* 
\  subject 
\,  subjection 
y  sure 
r    tell,  till 
(    that* 

•    the*  ^ 

(    them 
(^  then 

On  thb  following  page  is  a  different  class  of  word- 
HJgns,  their  signification  being  indicated  by  the  position 
in  which  the  sign  is  writton  to  the  line.  Three  positions 
are  recognized :  on  the  line,  above  the  line,  and  through 
or  below  the  line.  In  the  tabic  the  line  of  writing  is 
suggested  by  »  dotted  line,  which  will  uide  the  learner 
as  to  wher    Mie  word  should  be  written. 


when* 

c/^  whore 

y'  which 

L    while 

X   who 

>-    why* 

r  will 

=   with* 

(    without 

t^  wont 
"^  word 
cX    world 

>    would 

w    ye* 

o    yet 

r.    you 
^  your 
h     yours 


^^^'Ffl'^^^r^W^  '.f-r 


^"^<^^^^<"^^^^"*''^<^>«^^^^^>«'^»'9wrw^>wwwwiia»VWv 


■wmmuwiiwiiiniuinin.w 


III iiiiiiiiiiltiiM 


^_/ 


imimiii *i 


tA^.iiAAAA^<>^Ai*A****<i»A*  «  «  «  « 1 1 


118 


MANUAL    OF    PHONOGRAPHY. 


-f-   Allow 
^ '  another 


any 
at 


.:>^..  away 


.... 

i. 


by 

different 
Doctor 
down 
during 
each 
..■'..    either 


y 


^ 


ever 
-V    few 
-f-  had 
^-  happy 
«_l-hear,  here 


-^-  however 

-{-  itself 
~^   kind 
-^■-  large 
,•— >    may 


me 
mind 


.y/~.  much 
1"~~  neither 
5N^..  number 

..^  other 
1      ought 
..>^..  our 
...:\_  ours 
:n^  ourselves 
— j.._  out 
owa 


.™_   perfect 

■<■■ 
( 

i 

■<■-■ 

->■• 

L 

>- 

•V 


practic.bie 
read 

see 
than 

thank 

thee 

these 

those 

though 

through 

time 

us 

use  (verb) 

valuo 

view 

will  (noun) 


I »  »  I  ij  I  r  I 


m»»m»>>i  t ^rww^i'^r^T^ 


ihiiKM^tt 


lONOGRAPHY. 

ever 

■x 

perfect 

-V 

practicable 

[f 

^ 

read 

I 

) 

see 

e 

•-£- 

than 

■■<- 

thank 

( 

thee 

d 

4 

these 

f- 

those 

her 

aber 

<- 

though 

3r 

•->■• 

through 

ht 

1 

time 

->-- 

us 

) 

>- 

use  (verb) 

selves 

„^. 

valuo 

•v 

view 

(^ 

will  (noun) 

— Itllllll 


hdatal^rfb**^ 


CONTRACTED  WORDS. 


119 


CONTRACTED  WORDS.  ' 
In  addition  to  the  word-signs  that  have  been  given, 
represented  by  the  alphabetic  signs,  simple  and  com- 
pound,  a  list  of  contracted  words  is  given  below.  These 
are  abbreviated  by  giving  the  more  prominent  conso- 
nants that  would  be  employed  in  writing  the  word  in 
full.  Words  having  a  *  affixed  are  written  above  the 
line. 


/^  acknowledge 

•^  acknowledged 

because* 
L  doctrine 

^   especial-ly 

^  expensive 

"%/  extraordinary 

1     extravagant 
V^  forward 
''     highly* 
^'~t>  himself 
— ^.  imperfect 
— .\o  imperfection 
^°  importance* 
-^t:^  impracticable 
^^  inconsistent 


^   indispensable 
""■^  individual* 
">-^  influence* 
^>-o^  influential* 
X  instruction 
I    interest 

"\_  irregular 
^~^  knowledge 
manuscript 
■  myself* 
'  natural 


■•/ 


never 


^i;^  nevertheless 


.new 


v_^  next 

"^  notwithstanding 

"i-^now 


i'"»*»»"»n »»iiiiru»i'iin  titm*'rf9*wfF9ww'^9mfn 


120 


MANUAL   OP   PHONOGRAPHY. 


\. peculiarity 

V^^^  Phonetic  Society 
\/^  Phonographer 
\j —  Phonographic 
\   Probablr,^ 

/       regular 

/  N  represent 
'   \  I  represented 

/n.  representation 
/n.     ropublio 

.  ^s^  respect 
/^  responsible 
-\-  satisfaction 


V   several 
something 

'^'^'^S^  Spelling  Reform 
%)  surprise 
J— >^  transcript 

^— »  transgress 
^    understand 
^   understood 

«»     universal 

whenever 


'^^  whensoever 
</\.  wherever 
</V  wheresoever 


In  the  complete  reporting  style,  the  list  of  contracted 
words  is  considerably  extended ;  but,  like  the  above, 
they  are  all  very  suggestive  to  the  reflective  student, 
and  when  met  with  in  correspondence  or  elsewhere, 
there  will  seldom  be  any  difficulty  in  determining  what 
they  are.  The  Reporter's  Manual,  advertised  at  the 
close  of  this  book,  contains  complete  lista  of  word- 
signs,  contracted  words,  phraseography,  &c.,  the  study 
of  which  will  be  essential  to  verbatim  reporting,  but 
unnecessary  for   ordinary   purposes   of  writing. 


rwn*>>«M>Mi«>«*«wwv«iww*^ 


; 


~;> 


Qa> 


k-. 


1] 


mmmm 


'^■■^w.."«w»"<— w»w«wnwim  iniiaiiii.ui  jiim. i  ■ mnniiwini  .ii niiiiuuii. 


IRAPIIY. 


V  several 
N^  something 

s^^_^  Spelling  Reform 
%)  surprise 
— >^  transcript 

— 1>  transgress 
'f   understand 
^   understood 

«»     universal 

\^  whenever 

■^  whensoever 
X.  wherever 

V  wheresoever 

the  list  of  contracted 
but,  like  the  above, 
he  reflective  student, 
adcnce  or  elsewhere, 
in  determining  what 
il,  advertised  at  the 
iplele  lista  of  word- 
•aphy,  &c.,  the  study 
batim  reporting,  but 
»  of  writing. 


"^" :^^ —   M^— — I- I 


PHBASEOaRAPHY. 


121 


PHRASEOORAPHT. 

144.  Phraseography  consists  in  writing  two  or  more 
word.signs  together,  without  lifting  the  pen ;  and  in  the 
reporting  style,  it  is  extended  to  the  writing  of  word- 
signs  with  words  written  in  full,  but  not  vocalized.  The 
first  sign  in  a  phrase  should  be  written  in  its  natural 
position,  while  those  that  follow  take  any  position  that 
most  facilitates  the  writin". 


/       all  which 
"*^  any  thing 
"^      are  not 

\,^      as  far 

v^^     as  far  as 
Oi*     as  good  as 

<^     as  great  as 

of        as  it  has  been 
Q_P     as  soon  as 

Qj5      as  soon  as  possible 

0         as  well  as 
<rv-\  at  the  same  time 


\      be  able  to 
^     could  be 
_^.   could  not  be 

J      do  not 
Vj,    for  instance 
^r\  he  has  been 
V       if  there  is 

^^   have  been 
1  am 

I  !im  not 

1    I  do 

d     I  do  not 


I  I  I  »»»  w^fvw^f^^, „ ~ 


MANUAL   OF   PHONOaRAPHY. 


li**Mb*ArMl^^*^ 


^     I  will  not 
f^^    may  as  well 

'—v     may  be 

must  be 


-A. 


must  have 


'-N^ 

must  not 

-\h 

no  doubt 

> 

^: — 

of  course 

^ 

on  account  of 

^ 

ought  to  be 

A. 

should  be 

V 

should  have 

/- 

should  not 

o..       so  as  to 
c/—3   such  as  can 

^       that  is 


>*<b^*^<M 


•1, 


■^ 


r/> 


h^ 


I IH»«X 

lAPHY. 

I  will  not 
may  as  well 

may  be 
must  be 
must  have 

must  not 
no  doubt 
of  course 
on  account  of 

ought  to  be 

should  be 

should  have 

should  not 

so  as  to 
>   such  as  can 

that  is 


PHBA8E0UKAPHY.                                       123       1 

'\     there  are 

Z        we  were 

i,^    there  are  not 

C   _-?    when  thero  is 

7^    there  would  not 

^^      whether  or  not 

1.^    there  would  not  have 
^%      been 

^      think  that 

^       which  would 

/        which  would  not  be 

O     this  is 

<        which  it  would  be 

\    to  be 

<        which  it  would  have 
^^      been 

"^      to  do 

"1       to  have 

P      will  not 
'N     will  not  be 

»YV      you  should  be 

f       without  doubt 

f/~    you  will 

/      with  which 

y^  you  will  be  able  to 

^      with  which  it 

«•*     you  will  not 

t^    with  which  it  is  not 

V     we  have 

/^    who  are 

Vj     we  have  not 
V..,^^  we  have  not  had 

^     would  be 
i,^  would  not  be 

i 

if: 


i 


hi 


15!  r 


M>****«rf>A***^h*di*^ftAA*A***AA^^M<kAMk 


124 


MANUAL   OP   PIIONOURAPIIY. 


A  word  of  caution  is  necessary  against  a  too  extensive 
use  of  phraseography ;  it  should  never  be  Uowed  to 
destroy  the  lineality  of  the  writing,  nor  make  difficult 
joinings.  In  either  case,  time  will  be  saved  by  remov- 
ing the  pen  from  the  paper,  and  commencing  afresh. 

In  phraseography,  the,  or  some  other  unimportant 
word,  is  occasionally  omitted;  as,  "*-*^  in  the  world; 
\a__  for  the  sake  of.  The  connective  word  and  is 
sometimes  written  in  connection  with  the  following 
word,  where  \t  may  be  represented  by  a  small  horizontal 
stroke;   y 


and  the,     ->  and  which. 


Wbitinq  Exercise  XXXVII. 

NoTB. — In  the  following  ezeriise  instead  of  repeating  the  initial  wordi 
of  phrases  every  time  they  are  to  be  writtun,  they  are  indionted  by  dashes; 
and  the  other  worda  forming  a  phrase  are  connected  by  hyphens. 

Gl.    01-hiz,  (61'z)  —  iz  lost,  —  hwig,  —  dis,  —  dat-iz-aed, 

—  men,  —  dv>  —  suq-tiBZ,  —  impertant. 
Ov.    Ov-it,    —  hwig,  —  suq, az-q,r,   —  me,  (mj,) 

—  rajn,  (men,)  —  dqr,    —  imi)ortaus,  —  hiz,  —  advantaj, 

—  dis  kind,  —  dat,  —  dem,  —  kors. 
On.    On-el, suq,  —  ak«nt-ov,  —  mj,  —  us,  —  h^r, 

—  d^r,  —  hiz, Bid. 

Tv .     Tu-it,  —  do,  —  be,  —  hav, bin, dun, 

—  BUKi-okstent,  —  luv,  —  him,  —  dat,  —  meni. 
Hat.    Hoj-iz-dis,  —  wud, not,   —  ma, not, 

(man't,)  —  kan,  —  no,  —  qr, not,  (qrnt.) 

End.    Sud-be,  —  not-be,  —  hav,  —  da,  —  not-hav-sed, 

tiok-dat 

9,    i-am,  —  ma,  —  am  not,  er  ma-not,  —  dcD,  (had,) 

not,  (don't,  hadn-t)  —  hav, not,  (wid  huk,) bin, 

—  kan-not,  —  wil,  —  tiflk,  —  Jal,  —  never,  —  ned,  —  — 
not-sa,  —  hop,  —  fer,  —  beg,  —  am-veri-sori-inded,  —  hop 
ycD-wil-not-hav-rezn-tu-regret,  —  hav-no-dwt. 

H.V.    Hw-kud,  —  kan,  —  iz  dis,  —  meni,  —  ma,  —  so- 
ever, m  mm 
Ya>.    Tflft-Jud, not,  —  kud,  —  kan,  —  ya><ma,  —  wil, 

—  qr,  (r  up-stroke) not,  (qrnt,)  —  must, be.s^rten. 


T 


RAPIIY.  ! 

gainst  a  too  extensive 
never  be  llowed  to 
ig,  nor  make  difficult 

be  saved  by  reinov- 
immencing  afresh, 
e   other  uuiiuportant 

^*— </    in  the  world; 
nective   word   and  is 

virith    the   following 
by  a  small  horizontal 


j:xxvii. 

f  repeating  the  initlAl  wordi 
they  are  indionted  by  dashes; 
Deoted  by  hyphens. 

liq,  —  dis,  —  dat-iz-aed, 
ant. 

—  az-q,r,  —  me,  (mi,) 
8,  —  hiz,  —  advantajj 

T,  —  mj,  —  us,  —  h§r, 

, bin, dun, 

t,  —  meni. 

lot,    —  ma, not, 

)t,  (qrnt.) 
—  dot),  —  not-hav-sed, 

not,  —  dm,  (had,) 

(wid  htak,) bin, 

—  never,  —  ned,  —  '■ — 
veri-sori-inded,  —  hop 
no-dst. 

—  meni,  —  ma,  —  ao- 

m  mm 

—  kan,  —  ya)<ma,  —  wil, 

—  must, be.a^rten. 


■  »>>»»>>»i>»»t>»»»»>ii' 


***A<idHkakA*«ahkAA**^ 


ta^M^i«^^k*^**A< 


k****AAA**^tt**<kAA* 


EXERCISE   ON    PIIRASEOaRAPIIY. 


125 


We.     We-w§r,  —  dm,  —  did,  —  hav, aen,  —  ^it-** 

—  we  Jal,  —  qr,  (r  ui)-Btroke,) not,  —  fjnd. 

Wid.  Wid-it,  —  hwiq,  —  dis,  —  dat,  —  dem,  —  hwiq-yoi 
f4r-akwanted.  —  siiQ-az-qr.  m 

W?r.  W^r-da,  —  we,  —  dat,  Hw^r-iz,  (hwqr-z)  (r  up- 
stroke.) 

Hwot.  Hwot-iz,  —  w^r,  —  wud,  —  dm,  —  if,  —  qr,  — 
kud-be, posibli. 

Wud.  Wud-ym,  —  be,  —  dm,  —  hav,  —  not,  —  not-hav- 
sed. 

B.  Be-aed,  —  abl-tu.  Bj-dis,  —  me,  —  moni,  —  sum- 
menz,  —  everi-menz,  —  sum-p^rsonz,  —  dqr. 

T.     It-iz, not, sed, smn,  ( the   last  two 

with  a  double  circle,) mj,  —  ma,  —  kan,  —  kud,  — 

wud.     Gt-tu-be.     At-suq,  —  prezont,  —  de-sam-tim. 

D.    Dm-da,  —  not,  (  don't,) dst. 

G.     Hwig-wud,  —  had,  —  kud,  —  kan,  —  haz, bin, 

—  iz-not,  —  qr, not,  —  ma,  —  mjt,  —  wil,  (q-1.)   Hwiq . 

it-iz, ma, wud, kud-not-hav. 

P.     It-dat,  —  ym,  —  d^r,  ( double-f  above  the  line.)    Fer- 

«U"3, az-qr,  —  hwig,  —  sum-tim,  —  dqr,  (double-f  on  the 

line.)     If-it-w?r, be, iz, had. 

V.  hav-ym,  —  bin,  —  bad,  —  «ed.  Veri-gud,  —  grat,  — 
sam,  —  s^rten,  —  wel,  —  smn,  —  mug.  Everi-pqrt,  —  wun, 
■—person,  —  man. 

R.    Rink-dat,  —  ym-qr, wil, ma. 

a.     Widst-dst,  —  hwiQ,  —  suq.     Eat-it, iz, 

liaz-bin, wo*,  —  qr, not,  —  iz-not, tu-be, 

■-  haz,  —  hwiq.    Sa-w^jr,  —  dm,  —  'lad,  —  hav,  —  ma.    Sia- 

tim,  —  da,  —  advantaj.     a^r-wud,  —  kan,  —  kud, 

not-bav-bin,  —  iz,  (haz,)  —  Jal,  —  wil,  —  qr, 8um-p?r- 

sonz,  —  ma. 

S.     So-az, tu,  —  it-semz,  —  veri,  —  litl,  —  muq,  — 

meni.     Suq-wud,  —  iz,  —  az, qr, ma. kan, 

kud, hav, wo7, wil. 

Z.     Iz-it, not    Az-it, wud, woz,  —  — 

ma, haz.    Az-gud,  —  —  az,  —  grat, az,  —  fqr, 

az,  —  wel,  —  meni,  —  amn-az.    Iz-not;  haz-not. 

S.    Sal-be,  —  hav,  —  dm,  —  fjnd,  —  not. 

L.     Wil,  —  not,  —  be,  —  hav,  —  f^nd. 

B.     ilr-ym,  —  sumtimz,  —  aori,  ~  not;  —  ym  qr  veri,  — 

—  trmli. 

M.    Ma-be,  —  hav,  —  da,  —  az-we),  —  konsider.    Mit-hav, 

—  dis,  —  sem.     Must-be,  —  trj,  —  dm,  —  kum,  —  go,  —  se, 


'****^**'*^^^^^^*w^'w<iw*«'www«^n>ww««iw«vwwww« 


<<f*' 


■MMMi 


I *^ 


il 


126 


MANUAL   OF   PHONOGRAPHY. 


Ukli, 


important. 


'      not.       Mo8t-hapi,  ( inos--hopi,)    - 

»  N    Tn:;i,  .- k^nBekwc^s,  -  fukt  --  die.  -  suq,  _  men.. 
ti„z  -  hi^.'   Eni-wun,  -  tic  -  bod.      No-paJ  -  d,t^  - 

Not,  -  vt,  -  kwit,  -  dat,  -  in,  -  onli,  -  n3,  -  non,  ned 
not.    Nor-wfr,  —  iz-dis,  —  qr. 

Wbitinq  Exercise  XXXV. 

(In  phraceography,  and  contnlning  all  the  word-siga«.) 
ON  IMPRG)VMENT. 
Eatablifnionts  for  imprmvmont,  partikviilarli  ov  <Je  mpd,  v 
veri  impirtaattiBZ  in  a  kifldom;  and  de  mor  «o  hwy  it- z 
vimial   wid-de.a  tu  establif  and   praktu  «ud  pnn».plz.     d 
^iSaf^k  esrblijment  in  pirtikyular.  i.  not  °n  '  «"  'medrnt 
advantaj  tu  everi  jentiman  hO)  iz  a  member  ov-it,  buttu-o. 
AkerS  tu  jencrnl  opinyon,  Fonografi  u.  a  «ub.,ekt  we  fM<.«  • 
hav  ,  Sur  in  and  ti^k  upon;  widst  it,  langwa,  iz  not  hwot-.t- 
ud.be-a   emcirk  in-hwiq  d^r-i..  grat  tra>t,  and  tu-hwjQ  d^- 
Wbe  no  objckfon.     "ills,  er-on  hwot  prinsipl,  kan  we  be  guid 
er  «^t  wid^iimprmvment.     Remember,   f  ^  "^  «;0  '^  a^ 
objekt  ov-impertana  dat  kuma  undent;  and,  beyond  el,  dat  de 
fur  wurd  ov  ^e  Lord  God  woz  givn  for  imprmvment. 
^^Afte     hwot-i-hav-told-yo.,    Iv-d^r   yet    olaekJ[on«    tu-it 
Wer  dar  an  aksnt  ov-dem  wud  elredi  hav-bm  givn       Grat 
anttC  Iran  not  k«m  tugeder  wid»t-impra>v,no«t.     Eud 
i"li.SSt  itma-hav-binBO,  j-Jal  remark-dat,  from  hwot 
no  oV-de  ieneral  spirit  ov  el,  de  tr<i.t  iz  az  i-hay  givn  it,   ne 
k!n  y^obfekUu-lt.     In  Jert,  jontlmen,  establif  .t  az  y«.r  f«rst 
priniipl  dat-vm-wil-not  giv  up;  but,  az  ya,  hav  oportiimt ,  dm 
Klkan-be-dun  tordz"impm,vment  in  even  W,  so  w.l  ya> 
giv  plesnr,  not  tu-me-alou,  but  tu  el. 


13 


(••••••••W^WW*'"^^'"' 


» < 


BAPHY. 


-  Ul^li- 


important. 


—  dig,  —  suq,  —  mem- 

i.    No-pcirt,  —  Asl,  — 

tip,  ( in  full.)    NTj-s?r. 

.nli,  —  ns,  —  noD}  ned- 


XXXV. 

itll  the  word-«iga«.) 

;nt. 

ikyu,larli  ov  dc  mpid,  (\,t 
1  de  inor  so  hwi^r  it-iz 
vkti»  yud  prin»iplz.     d 
•,  iz  not  onli  an  imediat 
member  ov-it,  but  tu-ol. 
i  iz  a  aubjelit  we  Jm(^  «>!• 
t,  Unigwaj  iz  not  hwot-it- 
,  tro)*,  aiid  tu-hwiq  d^r- 
t  prinsipl,  kan  we  be  gud 
ber,   dat  overi  tij)  iz  an 
t;  and,  beyond  el,  dat  de 
ttr  imprmvment. 
^r   yet    objekjona    tu-it, 
edi  hav-bin  givn.      Grat 
idst-improBvmoBt.     Eud 
remark -dat,  from  hwot  j 
iz  az  i-hav  givn  it,   ner 
en,  establif  it  az  ya>r  f^rst 
az  ym  hav  oportiiniti,  dm 
,  in  everi  til);  so  wil  yo) 
1. 


AN  EXTENDEP  ALPHABET. 


127 


ttenhi  lilrtaht. 


I 


I  i 


Long  Vowels. 

I    9     earihjE.;  le,  F. 
i  n,  6  fair,  JET.;  fr^re  F. 
I    ft    p&te,F. 
I    0    Kiinig,  G. 

eu   deux,  F. 

u    rue,  F. 


7 

8 

9 

10 

11 


Short  Vowels. 

i    ici,  F. 
^    6t6,  F. 

a,  a  a8k,2^.;patte,jp'. 
0    Bijcke,  O. 
0     bonne,  F. 


12 1  il    ii    Kiinste,  G. 


Xasal  Vowels. 

13  <i^  in     fin,  /T 

14  -L^  en    en,  danse,/^. 


^  un    brun,  F. 
•^  on    bon,  F, 


17 
18 
19 
20 


Consonants. 
-.J-  ch  ich,6r.;loch,/S^. 
-f-  gh  ein'g,  6?. 
(^     11   Llanelly,  IT. 
» /^  r    amor,  I, 


In  thti  introduction  to  this  work  (See  pp.  15,  16,  17,) 
it  was  shown  that  an  accurate  analysis  of  the  English 
language  gave  forty-^hree  elementary  sounds,  including 
the  diphthongs  necessary  to  h".  regarded  as  simple 
sounds;  and  in  the  writing  exercises  of  the  phonotypic 
edition  this  number  of  sounds  are  represented,  althoagh, 
on  account  of  the  greater  simplicity  of  a  six-vowel  scale, 
three  vowels,  (?,  q,  a,)  have  not  been  recognized  in  the 
phonographic  exercises. 


wwwv^ '^ 


■■owwwwwwv^^www^ 


^Mk*aM*************«^Mii4Mh*MMi*M 


^MMMMkA**<k<MW 


128 


MANUAL   or   PIIONOOEAPUY. 


For  the  benefit  of  such  as  may  wish  to  bo  as  precise 
in  the  reprcHontation  of  correct  pronunciation  in  their 
writing  as  it  is  advisable  to  bo  in  printing,  three  addi- 
tional signs  for  the  English  language  are  provided  on 
the  preceding  page.  Suitable  signs  are  also  given  for 
the  additional  sounds  used  in  the  French  and  German, 
&e.,  which  will  enable  those  who  understand  these 
languages  to  employ  Phonography  in  writing  them. 

Nos.  1,  2,  and  9,  will  be  recognized  as  English  by  the 
words  rarth,  air,  ask.  No.  6  is  so  near  the  close  Eng- 
lish diphthong  «  in  d«pe,  that  it  may  be  used  for  that 
sound,  leaving  the  sign  „  for  the  combination  J/U  or  yOi. 
No.  11  is  very  near  the  New  England  o  in  stone,  whole, 
&o.,  and  may  be  used  by  them  for  its  representation. 

The  French  nasal  sounds,  represented  by  in,  en,  «», 
an,  tin,  on,  and  heard  in  t»m,  No.  13;  timps,  No.  14;  tm, 
No.  IB;  pent,  No.  16,  are  pure  vowch,  but  prmounced 
through  the  note,  as  well  as  through  the  mouth.  Tempt, 
for  instance,  contains  but  two  sour.ds,  namely,  t  and 
the  14th  nasal  vowel  (<•,  d,  r,  s,  t,  when  terrniimtiug 
French  words,  are  generally  silent).  En/ant  ,(  stains 
but  three  sounds ;  namely,  the  consonant  /,  preceded 
and  followed  by  No.  14. 

The  Scotch  guttural  in  loch,  nicht,  etc.,  and  frequent, 
also,  in  German,  Welsh,  and  other  languages,  is  repre- 
sented by  — *■,  with  a  wave  line  through  it.  The  vocal 
guttural,  as  in  geig,  is  represented  by  the  same  sign 
thickened. 

The  Welsh  LI,  which  is  the  whispered  form  of  the 
English  I  is  represented  by  /^  with  a  wave  line  struck 
through  it.  This  sound  is  produced  by  placing  the 
tongue  \n  the  position  for  uttering  the  English  I,  but 
emitting  breath  instead  of  voice. 


/ 


V 


rwwwwwwwwww^'vwww^ 


f 


li**MMl*^i***^**^^^M 


lAPiiy. 


ish  to  bo  as  precise 
onunciation  in  their 
printing,  three  addi- 
nge  are  provided  on 
»  are  also  given  for 
?reneh  and  German, 

0  understand   these 
in  writing  them. 

ed  as  English  by  the 
near  the  close  Eng- 
uay  be  used  for  that 
mbination  ^y,  or  yOi. 
md  o  in  stone,  whole, 
its  representation, 
isentcd  by  in,  en,  em, 
I;  t>mp».  No.  14;  un, 
ncrh,  but  pronounced 

1  the  mouth.  Tempt, 
turds,  namely,  t  and 
t,  when  terrniimtiug 
t).  Enfant  ,(  stains 
)nsonant  /,  preceded   | 

t,  etc.,  and  frequent, 

languages,  is  repre- 

irough  it.     The  vocal 

d  by  the  same  sign 

hispered  form  of  the 
h  a  wave  line  struck 
need  by  placing  the 
g  the  English  I,  but 


k****<k********************tfi**A4MMh>Mi***tt< 


DKCLARATION   OV    INDEPENDKNOK. 


129 


(Passed    July  4th,   1776.) 


/x    ^   "^   c+-   '    ^«  'W     I      \.    v^  V 
-    \  V     1^    •    ^  >.     /    V    — 1-      (      ' 

•  y'-O      S  \  m        V^V        /  I"  X 


A" 


******«>*<»«>*^*<MiAfc— i*«i**.fc«  «  «  «  t  «  «  «  1 


i;jo 


MAt^...'.Ij  or   PHONOORAPIIY. 


jx  ■•  .o    ,A=r">  s  ^r  "^-^r^ 


^W»**»W«'*»**^**"W*»i»W*W^^»»»»*»»< 


|f>*'^^***^***'>**^>*  MM*i^k^M 


MHk*^<l*<^ 


UKCLARATION   OF   INDKPKNUKNCIC. 


iol 


c^.  •• 


X  .o 


>:A 


s\' 


S 


^' I 


.4i£^ 


u()&> 


132 

MANUAL    OP    PHONOaRAPIIY. 

L.                   .,6 

"\^;   A=r 

V    V 

;  ^  n' 

-^  )  ..-^  •■) , . 

J'    '     \      ^ 

W 

^ 

/^'       X 

&. 

'•°'V,'  -^^  ~f^ 

,  \  ^.    " 

..)•       N 

^  ^  •>  ^  ^  ^ 

/^x 

•'•«-/ 1^ 

■°C^'^^ 

A 

►  r^x 

//x 

'  w  ^^  . 

'«.      ••) 

'%^ 

^'^vX-^\ 

• '  1  ^  ^S 

X 

/^^ 

■«  ^  -^  ) » '^ 

--  ^^^,.. 

"\^} 

C    •   •«-     ^      /7^     X 

/J'x 

-.-K   ^^    -^ 

^ 

• 
^   5 

f 

\ 

/'^        \r^ ^ 

^PH 


bk^^^k^ft^^MM 


ONOaRAPIIY. 


'  ,  \  .AS.  ■"  .0-  N 


x./^    O^ 


^ 


0- 


vj      ^ 


DECLARATION   OP    INDEPENDENCE. 


133 


/fx    V.   "q    '^     ^  V    '    ^     \^c.   . 

//^x  V.  •'^.  Li)   ^  )    (    ->^  -^  : 
^rs   <f    ^-   C    _.^: 


'••*''''»»"<^^»'<W*W"^^»**^^^^»«P^»^^^*H^^P>»**WW*"»Wi*W***W»»W<PWwi| 


mmmmmmmmm 


>AA*A**«*<bA**il 


*■ 


134 


MANUAL   OF   PHONOGRAPHY. 


'    V    ^     (°  \     )     J.    X 

^.9x  ""  ^  y  I-  'X  V  \A  A  ^^^ 


•^ 


L 


*^^'»'**W*»*WW*"»***^^^"P^»^^W*>*«»*^^PWi^»WPW»i^ii|HW**W<»*W»» 


GBAPHY. 


-tf» 


<~f> 


?  X 


r 


>*********«* 


DECLARATION  OF  INDKPENDENCE. 


135 


3/x^  ^^\^'-.\^^^  \j^  X  V 


''*^^>^*''l^>«<'WV<*WW«i«WWW^ 


im>» 


i 


^*^^Mi«i******d 


136 


MANUAL   OK    PIIONOilRAl'lIV. 


/ 


I 


bu 


frleni 

riua 

Ti 

pcnoi 

In 

ths  A 

electa 

Anj 

ftelii 

nndei 

1.  1 

fnm' 

2.1 

8.T 

4.1] 

ioleniM 

•.  L 

Ttil 

netiei 

tributa 

Intarae 

Uil 

attend 

expedii 

thsAin 

Uft 
mm  of 
Appu 
tion,  to 
ippIicM 
bntion. 


t 


Al'llV. 


-:.  ^        ^       S- 


k^  I  L^  , 


\.%/ 


/ 


~^     cr- 


I 


^.     X 


wv^r<ww^F^»^pf"*^^vwFrT* 


AMERICAN  PHONETIC  ASSOCIATION. 

39"esnient. 

Braw  PrriiAir,  Phonographlo  IiuUtuto,  Cluclnnatl,  0. 

Sectetacjt.  Ettmuttv. 

tms  I*»au,,  V!d,  St.,  Clnolnn.tl.  0.  R.  P.  Pho«i,,  Ctaclnn.«,  0. 

Evccutfbe  ©ommrttte. 
CHAmra  S.  RoTci,  Plymontb,  Bicbland  Cb,  0. 
Dk.  J.  W.  Stohi!,  Bostou. 
D».  Adams  Jkvitt,  Dayton,  0. 
Da.  8.  D.  Nawsao,  Unaing,  MIoh. 
f-  0.  Adams,  Kaoau  Caty,  Mo. 

Tha  o«Mt  of  this  A«««,Utlon  la  the  union  and  coK)p«ration  of  .11  th. 
tt.nd.ofth.  Writing  ana  Printing  Reform  in  th.  UnL  SUt,.  tLS^ 
ri.a  and  Canada.,  for  the  promotion  of  their  common  can.. 

JL'.tr'i;!!.'"'  '","<^'""«»  '»  »«.  "1  upward,  of  fl««n  hnndr«l 
PCTMn.  bar.  been  enrolled  a.  memberfc 

.i,!°A*^**!'^f'  ""'  ""  ~"'"""i^-"'  *"  "ubmltted  to  th.  member,  of 

Any  p.rKn  may  become  a  member  of  this  Awociatlon  (see  Article  91  who 

i'  "'"»"•"  '"  "">  P"""""""  Of  th.  Writing  and  ^InZ  Refrrl 
under  either  of  the  fcUowlng  claasea :  "mting  Keform, 

F.I  m^^'*'"  '""•  '"'"'"'""'  '•"""""*  """"'■  '*  ""  "*•  «*  »«>  word. 

8-  Thoie  who  write  Phonetic  Longhand.  J«««inB  .tyi^ 

4.  Honorary  member.,  who,  having  no  praotlcU  acqu.lnt«,ce  with  th. 

Trm'rb:!""'''^''*"''"'*''''''^--*"-^^^^^^ 

W^.r?  .?  ?    ''"°"°'^'  •"  '»"«»I»»''"<'».  •nd  otherwUej  and  to  con- 
"t^t^ -.LtriL^"-''"-  ----  •»  ---  -  - 

J^^  ^  *'  """  "'  *"•  "'""'  "-•  '"'°  »»«  ~  P«««c«l  tabor,  to 
^Und  to.  to  nM  thd,  inflnence.  in  whatever  way  th.y  may  Jndg.  mort 

th.  fand.  of  the  Treasury  .  ^  of  not  le«  than  «1.00  annually. 

AppUcatlon  (br  membwahlp  to  b.  mad.  to  th.  S«!r.tary  of  th.  Awori.. 
m^t  d.rir«  to  Jol=.  and   «=c«npanled  with  an  appropriate  contri- 


1 


Pablished  and  Sold  by  Longley  Brothers,  Cincinnati,  0. 

THE  SPELLING  REFORM— Instituted  to  make  uniyewal  educition  poasi- 
bio,  by  rendering  the  arfa)  of  Reading  and  Writing  pleasant  and  t.-^y  to  aoquire. 
PiiONOTTPY  is  a  rational  gystom  of  spelling  word«  as  they  are  pronounood, 
by  employing  an  enlarged  alphabet  conUining  a  separate  letter  for  eoch  sound, 
by  which  means  the  drudgery  of  learning  to  spell  is  entirely  dispensed  with, 
and  learning  to  road  is  accomplished  in  one-fourth  of  the  time  required  in  the 
old  way.  1'honooeafbt  is  a  truly  philosophical  method  of  writing  the 
English  Language,  by  an  alphabet  composed  of  the  simplest  geometrical  sign*, 
which  accurately  represent  the  sounds  of  spoken  words.  It  may  be  written 
sjx  times  as  fast  as  ordinary  longhand,  and  is  equally  legible,  and  such  ii  the 
simplicity  of  the  art  that  it<  vrinoiples  may  ba  easily  mastered  oven  without  the 
■id  of  a  teacher. 

Th*firft  prict  it  that  charged  at  th«  emmter;  tht  Meond  indvdti  tMi 
prtpayment  <jf  piistagt;  a  liberal  reduction  by  the  quantity. 


Phonotypic   Wc.  lis. 
Chart  of  the  Phonotypic  Alphabet,  on  a  sheet  24 

by  34  inches,  10—11 

The  same,  36  by  60,  with  ezplanatoiy  matter,  and  remarka  on  the 

acquisition  of  Good  Reading,  50— i>4 

The  eajie,  on  canvas  and  roller,  1^0 

Phonetic  Primer,   each  letter  illustrated  with  a 

letter  suggestive  of  its  sound,  IQ ^n 

First  Phonetic  Reader,  containing  simple  and  in- 
teresting reading  lessons,  20^26 
W%A  thete  hooh  teachere  and  parent*  can  enmmenee  a  courte  qf 
Phonetic  inetmetitm,  in  all  cm^fidenee  that  ether  bouhi  will/oUou 
aifatt  at  they  may  be  wanted. 

The  Transition  Reader,  or  a  Course  of  Inductive 

Romanic  Reading  Lessons,     For  the  use  of  Phonetic  Readers  in 
learning  to  reod  Komanically,  jO  -26 

Biographies  of  the  Presidents,  with  their  Portraits. 

Inpaperoovera,  40— 46;  in  cloth,  gilt  lettering,  60—80 

New  Testament,  12mo.  edition,  according  to  the 

Buthoriied  version.    In  cloth,  76—90:  darkahe^j,  $1,00—1,16;  mo- 
rocco, gilt,  "  $1,60-1,65 

Money-Getting  and  Money-Spending ;  a  Prize  Es- 

aayof  twenty-four  chapters ;  a  serious  and  reformatorv  work.      In 
Wiper,  40— 45;  cloth,  '  60-M 

nonetic  Singer,  in  the  Numeral  Notation,  with 

an  exposition  of  the  system.    In  cloth,  20—21 

The  Unbalanced ;  or  Method  in  his  Madness.    A 

Story  in  Exposition  of  Radical  Sentimon's.  (In  the  1847  alphabet.)    20—22 

Phonetic  Almanac,  and  Register  of  the  Spelling 

and  Writing  Reform,  together  with  a  list  of  the  American  Phonetic 
oooiety,  for  the  yean  1862, 1863, 1864,  and  1866, 


pC 


'i  ■■ 


J 


LONOLET  BROTHERS   LIST  OF  PUBLICATIONS. 


Phonetic   Longhand  Writer;     exhibiting    various 

itylos  of  Penmanship,  iq u 

Longhand  Alphabet,  in  Blips,  to  be  used  as  a  key 

bv  enuloiing  in  letters  written  in  phonetio  longiiand.    I'or  liouon,  d— T 

School  Credit  Tickets.— A  handsome  and  useful 

form  of  Crwlit  Tickets,  in  I'honotio  drofa.  Tho  Tioliet  in  aduutud  fur 
IhimaTy  and  District  Schools.     I'or  hundred,  25 SO 

The  Type  of  the  Times ;  a  large  weekly  newspa- 
per, mostly  in  Phonetio  speUing,— «  Deroted  to  all  the  True  luturo»t» 
of  tho  Human  Race."    Per  year,  $2  00 

The  Youth's  Friend;  an  elegant  monthly  paper, 

doTotod  to  the  improvement  of  the  young.  Embollishcd  with  Por- 
trait* and  Hiitorloai  Olustrations,  partly  in  tho  phonitMc  orthogmphy. 
60  wnti »  year ;  throe  oopiea,  $1,00 ;  ten  copies,  $3,00 ;  twenty  copies,   $5,00 

Phonographic    Works.  " 

First  Lesson  in  Phonography ;  Containing  the  Al- 
phabet and  a  simple  reading  Icsacin.    Useful  for  lecturers  to  distribute 


60— <0 


in  an  audience,  ke.  1  ct.    Per  hundred, 

American  Manual  of  Phonography ;  being  a  com- 
plete exposition  of  Phonetic  Shorthand,  especially  arranged  so  as  to 
give  the  fullest  instruction  to  those  who  have  not  the  assistance  of  the 
oral  toaeher.    In  paper,  40 — 12 ;  cloth,  50—50 

^y  jTAm  initryctum  booh  is  just  pvhluM,  and  differ*  from,  any  filter 
work  iiflhe  kind  in  thin  impurtant  veutiinilar:  h  thir<AifiM>i  "'rjluint 
the  PhtMnt^pic  tir  new  printing  atphahet,  and  itn  aeri'iste  fi.t  «rit- 
ing  are  printed  phimelicaUy,  wtirh  enahha  the  pv/jil  ti>  pntffreeg  tm/re 
eorrectty  and  rajiidly  than  if  printed  in  the  ordinary  </rt^,grapAp. 

Reporter's  Manual   and    Vocabulary;    being  an 

adaptation  of  Phonography  to  verbatim  reporting.    In  cloth,      $1,00-  -1,10 

Shorthand  Chart,  34  by  50  inches.     In  sheets,  40 

—42;  on  canvas  and  rollers,  $1,25 

Declaration   of    Independence,    neatly  engraved, 

and  printed  in  beautiful  style,  lo 11 

Phonographic  Copy  Slips,    consisting  of  a  series 

of  Progressive  Exercises  for  tho  learner  to  read  and  copy;  or  it  may  bo 

used  as  an  ornamental  chart,  for  attracting  the  attention  of  stmngors,  25 30 

The  Phonographic  Magazine :  A  Monthly  Miscel- 
lany of  Science,  News  and  Entertainment.  This  work  is  written  in 
the  Corresponding   Style  of  Phonography,  introducing  tho  simpler  i 

Phrosuography  of  the  UeportinK  Style.    Conduotod  by  Bonn  Pitman. 
Per  year,  in  advance,  $1,00 

The  Phonographic  Reporter :  A  Monthly  Magazine 

devoted  to  the  interests  and  instruction  of  the  I'honographie  Uo|x>rter, 

and  all  who  may  desire  to  become  such.    Conducted  by  Benn  ntman. 

Per  year,  in  advance,  $1,00 

Theie  work*  are  engraved  in  a  new  and  superior  style,  not  heretn/ore 

attempttd,  either  in  this  country^  or  in  England;  and  are  unmatched 

for  beauty  and  clearness  rf  outline.     Tlieij  are  tndispenmthle  to  ettry 

Phonographer  who  teishtt  to  thoroughly  team  or  eorreoUy  pratUot 

fkUart. 


I  Introc 

dooun 

Repot 

tlio  0 
per  d( 

Lectui 

first  II 
?l»h,  ] 

iDocur 

tlie  pri 
(Irod  pi 

I  Repori 

graphy 
tlio  Ph 
mittue 
Tills  is 
qrjitem 


I  Phonet 

mnnio  o 
aiphnbe 
large,  li 

[Reporti 

nograph 
ill  repor 
for  prps< 

iPhonog 

op«);for 

IPhonog 

I  adapted 

[Phonogi 

anjwher 
theirselv 
or  too  so 
different 
%\,n;  03 
tliut  if  tl 
turning  t 
rcixiints  ] 
(..tension 

IRepoitir 
IPbonogr 

Consisting 
often  bo  t 
and  of  in 
down  the 

'honetic 

itatoment 
■en  of  th 


wmm 


mmm 


mm 


[ilOATIONS. 


iting    various 

10—11 

sed  as  a  key 

I.    l'«r  tloxon,  6 — 7 

e  and  useful 

iket  is  oduptud  fur 

25— » 

ekly  ncvvspa- 

tb«  True  InturvU 


LONOtET  BBOIHEBS  htVt  OF  PPBUOATIOHI. 


mthly  paper, 

ollisfhcd  with  I'or- 
niftic  orthography. 
00 ;  twenty  copius, 


13,00 


$5,00 


rks. 

ning  the  Al- 

.urcrs  to  distributo 

60— <0 

being  a  com- 

'  arranged  so  m  to 
lu  Ojsiatunce  of  the 

50—58 
''«■»  from  any  ntfter 
lu/riAighbi  ''r/'laint 
frercinei  f>  lerit- 
l7  to  />riM/rega  tnnrt 
aiy  iiriKi.graphji. 

r;    being  an 

In  tilnth,       $1,U0-  -1,10 

n  sheets,  40 

$1,25 

ly  engraved, 

10—11 

;  of  a  series 

copy;  or  it  miiy  bo 

ition  of  stmngnra,  25 — 30 

nthly  Mi«cel- 

'ork  is  written  in 

icing  the  simpler  i 

by  Bonn  Pitmnn. 


ily  Magazine 

Dgraphio  Ucixirtor, 
I  by  Benn  Pitman. 

'/yU,  not  hertt/rfiyn 
ltd  art  unmatched 
'itpenmilile  to  every 
eorrtvUg  pratliui 


$1,00 


$1,00 


SO 


Phonetic  Works  Id  the  Cobwod  SpelllDg. 

Introduction  to  Phonography.  16  pp.:  an  excellent 

Report  of  the  Philadelphia  High  School  on  Phnnn  ^"~" 

./.tom  «,er  publish"eS!  V^ta^^^^^e^'^o^'"''"'  '"  ^'^'»  "'  ^\^,^ 

Idu       .     r.    '*•"«*»«  Stationery. 

Sf*'\^?P^"^°*'^«'  fo'  Common  Schools    fro- 

J   for  preserving  rcp,"r^  Vc  """^  "*'  **  ^"8*'' 

IPhonographic  Letter  Paper   fthe  m7p  nf  ««  ^^    i  *""** 

op«);forCi{;ul»tiugMaga.i„e7Z  ,/  i^'"^^^ 

\  or  t.«  80ft,  if  return^  immidiate'n  wm^^  "^  ^k"""  ^^T  *«"  '"*^ 
flifferont  Hexibilitr  iCn  „f.)f ^'.  1 T  "  "^  .•"^'hanged  for  one  of  a 
m-,  oxtrJ^uTii00,7^;ZZ"'''n^^^^^^  •""»'  warranted' 

•hut  if  the  point  ooie"'rf?,Tv^;  „  niTHI?""?  "  P""  wo  moan 

■nepoiting  Covers,  Morocco,  75—80:  Sheen  30_a»; 
ferti«.«-:fLSn^^  a  near;ol7emVi 


often  be?he  meanT^SoW  an  ffi?^^'*''"^''""^"'  """=■""" 
fd  of  introducing  PhonoShe™  f*^^^^  w  reference  to  Phonetics, 
down  the  earth.        '^'"""'«"'P»»e«  to  each  other,  as  they  pass  up  and 

^  80-4» 


$1,00 


fTO.OOO  in  to|  &  faluaHe  fuM 

WILL  BE    PISTRIBUTED  AMONG  THE 

TBir     THOUSAND     BUESCRIBBRB 

OP   THE 

TyPl  OF  THE  TIMES, 

A  Mammoth  Weekly  Family  Newspaper; 

COMMENCINa  IT8  EIGHTU  VOLUME  JANUARY  6TH,  1855. 

EDITED  AND  PUBLISHED  BY  LONGLEY  BROTHERS, 

Ko.  168}  Vlaa,  between  Fourth  and   Fifth  BtreeU. 

CINCINNATI,  OHIO. 

TEAMS    AND    INDUCEMENTS. 
Two  DoUara  per  Tear,  in  Advance,  with  a  Olft  or  Premlnm  to  I 
Bvery  BubBorlber,  ranging  In  value  from  Fifty  CenU 
to  Two  Hundred  Dollaral 
The  proprietors  of  the  Ttpe  of  thk  Timks  being  also  the  publlshere  of  I 
many  valuable  bookx,  which  they  wish  lo  get  into  the  hands  of  the  read- 
ing public,  oflfer  the  following  liberal  scab  of  Premiums   aa  inducerocnu 
for  largely  increasing  their  patronage,  to  be  distributed  aa    bood  as  toe 
list  reaches  ten  thoUHaiid  subscribers. 

Caah  Premiums  to  Acenta, 
To  the  Agent  sendlnn  Uie  largesl  number  of  Subicrlbert  between  now  and  18M     tOT  I 

To  the  A^eut seudUig  the  noxl  lurgeat  number, iv"! 

»i  it  it        ••••■•••■••■••••••'       •••  •••*•         "^  I 

II  II  »        ts| 

Book  Premlnma  to  gnbsertbcrs. 

IJMM  Cople»  of  Smalley'i  largo  Phosstic  Dut  n!«*«T,  (price  83,)  to  the  1,000 
iubscrlbert  at  the  •everul  post  «meo»  where  Iho  greateit  number  of  copies 
srosoiit V •• i"  •'•""I 

1,000  SeW  of  the  fullowlng  Book*:— HonsTY  as  it  I«  iso  as  it  Silontn  He, 
(5Uols,)  HiooRAi'HiMorTHc  Prmidents,  (50ct»,)  and  the  Masdai.  or 
ruoNooRAPHY,  (5U  cU.,)  to  the  1  ,IMH»  susbcrlbors  at  the  sovetol  post  offloes 
wliero  iho  kcoiuI  groulenl  iiiimbor  of  coplus  are  sent, • If" "I 

1,000  Seu  of  the  Uioukaphiss  of  tiik  Hrksidsnts,  (iiO  cW.,)  and  the  Mandal  or 
Pmohoorahiv.  (50  ild.,)  to  tlic  lOOt)  subsirlbers  at  the  several  post  offloes 

whuro  the  third  grcHli'sl  minibor  of  topios  are  sent, ;Ak' "^'      '     ' 

900  Copies  of  UieKsFORTitH'"  Manual  and  Voc:abclaiiv,  (81,)  to  the  SOO  sub- 
scribers nt  the  several  po»l  oIHcus  where  the  fourth  greatest  number  of 

copies  are  sent, ;••••:'  "J^^\."i ,  ?I«I 

1 JMW  Coplns  of  the  Phonetic  New  Testament,  (75  cts.,)  to  the  flflh  do.,. l,l-J| 

S,000  Set*  of  CoHRiE  CiiHmsas,  (23  cU.,)  Parents' and  rEAcuERs' Guide 
to  the  Moral  and  Intfllectual  Education  of  their  Children, (15  cts.,)  and 
Intemperance,  Choinlcally,  Physiologically  aud  Phrenologically  consld- 

erud,(tUct8.,)  lo  Ihe  sixth  do.,.. • \i","      ',.,■ 

1,500  Copies  of  the  Biouraphibs  or  the  Presidents.  (50  cbi.,)  to  the  seventh  do.       '»m 

l.tKH)  Coplesof  the  Manual  OP  Phonoor»phv,(5U  els.,)  to  Uie  eighth  do.,. wi 

500  Copies  of  MoNEv  Gkttino  and  Money  Npendimo,  an  Essay  on  Business, 
(50  cts.,)  to  the  next  greatest  ditto, ' 

10,000  Premlams.  ti0,00tl 

irpFoT  farther  partionlaTs.  send  to  the  publishers  for  SDeotmen  copies,  and  Soil 

•oription  Papers,  containing  foil  specifications  of  their  plan. 


I 


luaMe  fmU 

so  TUB 
aCRIBBRB 


f  Newspaper; 

JANUARY  6TH,  1855. 

y  BROTHERS, 

nd  Fifth  8tr««U. 

?. 

:MENT8. 

b  a  Gift  or  Pnmlnm  to  j 
from  Fifty  C«nU 
laral 

iing  also  the  publiRheri  of  I 
Into  the  hands  nf  the  read- 
['remiiims   aa  induceroont* 
istributed  aa   soon  ••  the  | 


•nta. 

1  betwoon  now  and  18U  9W>  I 

luol 

' sol 

ts| 

ortbcrst 

,  (price  83,)  to  the  1,000 
:reateit  number  of  coploi 
•3,««l| 

la  AND  AS  IT   RllOHLD   Be, 

IS ,)  and  tho  Manual  ur 
>t  the  several  post  oOlces 

sent, 1A"| 

cts.,)  and  the  Mandal  or 
it  the  several  post  offloes 

ent 1,««>I 

Aiir,  (SDtotheSUOsub- 
'Urtb  Kreuteat  number  of 

i.",')  to  the'  liflh  do. ,  ■ 1,125| 

■s'  AND  TiAcucRs'  GuiDa 
Ir  Children, (IS  cts.,)  and 
1  Pbrenologically  consld- 

1," 

SO  cts.,)  to  the  seventh  do.      1!*m 

,)  to  Uie  elfchth  do., VA 

>,  an  Essay  on  Business, 

$10,00(1 

I  for  ipectmen  oopias,  and8ab| 
heir  plan. 


y 


